Abstract:
Enhancements to customer care capabilities can be prioritized and presented using a repeatable methodology which allows information to be collected, processed, and utilized in a uniform fashion across engagements. Such a methodology can be designed so as to be flexible enough for any customization which is required in particular circumstances. Various tools which can be used in such a methodology include computerized surveys, evaluation formulae, prioritization graphs, and weighing scales.

Description:
This U.S. Continuation-In-Part patent application claims priority from U.S. Nonprovisional application Ser. No. 11/740,077, filed Apr. 25, 2007 now abandoned. 
    
    
     COPYRIGHT NOTICE 
     A portion of the disclosure of this patent document contains material which is subject to copyright protection. The copyright owner has no objection to the facsimile reproduction by anyone of the patent disclosure, as it appears in the Patent and Trademark Office patent files or records, but otherwise reserves all copyright rights whatsoever. 
     FIELD OF THE INVENTION 
     This invention is in the field of customer care consulting and analysis. 
     BACKGROUND 
     The field of customer care consulting and analysis is one in which current practices are largely confined to engagement-specific, non-repeatable methodologies, with little or no automation in data collection or analysis. For example, current customer care consulting firms Omega and Benchmark Portal provide online survey tools, but those survey tools having, respectively, 15 and 13 questions, are unable to capture sufficient information for meaningful data analysis, and must be augmented by massive amounts of anecdotal and observational data which are specific to a particular client. It would be preferable to have a methodology which is both repeatable (i.e., can be used consistently across engagements) and susceptible to automation. Additionally, it would be beneficial if the methodology were capable of incorporating multiple types of data (e.g., both automatically collected data, and consultant derived data) so as to be flexible enough to adapt to a broad variety of circumstances. The disclosure set forth herein describes systems, methods and computer readable media which can be used to achieve beneficial results such as those described above, as well as to achieve other results which will be immediately apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in view of the disclosure herein. 
     SUMMARY 
     Certain aspects of this disclosure could be implemented in a computer readable medium having stored thereon a plurality of questions, a plurality of exemplars, and a set of instructions operable to configure a computer. In such a computer readable medium, each question from the plurality of questions could be relevant to a customer care capability from a defined plurality of customer care capabilities. Further, the exemplars could be correlated with the plurality of questions such that, for each question from the plurality of questions, two or more exemplars from the plurality of exemplars could associate the question with a response format. Additionally, the set of instructions might be operable to configure the computer to determine a subset of questions from the plurality of questions for presentation to an individual. Such a subset of questions might comprise between 75 and 493 questions. Similarly, the set of instructions might be operable to configure the computer to obtain a set of response data from the individual to whom a subset of questions is presented. Such response data might correspond to one or more capabilities from the defined plurality of customer care capabilities. The response data might also be represented in the response format, and the response format might be a numeric format. 
     To understand the technology described in this disclosure, the phrase “computer readable medium” should be understood to include any object, substance, or combination of objects or substances, capable of storing data or instructions in a form in which they can be retrieved and/or processed by a device. A “computer readable medium” should not be limited to any particular type or organization, and should be understood to include distributed and decentralized systems however they are physically or logically disposed, as well as storage objects of systems which are located in a defined and/or circumscribed physical and/or logical space. 
     Similarly, the phrase “customer care capability” should be understood to refer to a competency related to one or more of an organization&#39;s customer care functions. Examples of “customer care capabilities” include business intelligence (i.e., using customer interaction data to determine the health and effectiveness of an enterprise through the eyes of the customer), talent alignment (i.e., optimizing the skills and agent profiles which align to customers based on value and/or customer segment requirements), and customer driven processes (i.e., using customer interaction data to improve business processes upstream and downstream from, as well as inside, the contact center). 
     Further, a “question” should be understood to refer to an expression of inquiry that invites or calls for a reply. When a question is described as “relevant” to a customer care capability, it should be understood that question is connected to, or associated with, the customer care capability. Additionally, the term “exemplar” should be understood to refer to a set of information or an object (e.g., a string of text, or a model), which is used to establish meaning or provide guidance. A “response format” should be understood to refer to a representation in which information provided as a consequence of some stimulus is expressed. To help tie these concepts together, the statement that “for each question, from a plurality of questions, two or more exemplars, from a plurality of exemplars, associate the question with a response format” should be understood to mean that, for each question, at least two exemplars are used to establish a meaning for the response format, or to provide guidance for how an answer to the question can be answered using the response format. 
     The term “subset” should be understood to refer to a first set, the first set consisting of one or more elements of a second set, which second set could possibly be coextensive with the first set. The verb “determine” (and various forms thereof) should be understood to refer to the act of generating, selecting or otherwise specifying something. For example, to obtain an output as the result of analysis would be an example of “determining” that output. As a second example, to choose a response from a list of possible responses would be a method of “determining” a response. The verb “present” (and various forms thereof) should be understood to refer to the act of showing, demonstrating, delivering, or the making available of something to a target audience or recipient. Thus, the act of “determining a subset of questions from a plurality of questions for presentation to an individual” should be understood to refer to the act of generating, selecting or otherwise specifying one or more questions which will be shown, delivered, or made available to a single human being. 
     By way of further explanation, the term “data” should be understood to refer to information which is represented in a form which is capable of being processed, stored and/or transmitted. The verb “obtain” (and various forms thereof) should be understood to refer to the act of receiving, or coming into possession of the thing “obtained.” To “obtain a set of response data corresponding to one or more capabilities” should be understood to refer to the act of coming into possession or receiving information which is associated by having a relationship with the one or more capabilities. Similarly, the statement that data is “represented in a numeric format” should be understood to mean that the data is expressed in a format which comprises symbols used to designate the position of an object in a series (though it should be understood that additional modes of expression, e.g., a “don&#39;t know” value, could also be included in a numeric format to indicate no position on the series for the object). Finally, the statement that a computer readable medium has stored thereon “a set of instructions operable to configure a computer” should be understood to mean that the computer readable medium has stored thereon data which can be used to specify physical or logical operations which can be performed by a computer. 
     By way of additional explanation of potential implementations, one of ordinary skill in the art could, in light of this disclosure and without undue experimentation, create a computer readable medium having stored thereon a set of instructions which are operable, not only to configure a computer to determine a subset of questions for presentation to an individual, but are also operable to configure a computer to obtain a set of identifying information for the individual. For some such computer readable media, the step of determining a subset of questions for presentation to the individual could comprise comparing the set of identifying information for the individual with a subject matter expertise associated with the individual. Further, in some such implementations, the set of instructions might be further operable to obtain a set of context data from the individual. Such context data might comprise the number of years the individual has worked in an industry associated with the individual&#39;s employment. 
     For the purpose of clarity, certain terms used in the above description should be understood as imparting particular meanings relevant to the technology of this disclosure. For example, “identifying information” should be understood to refer to information which can be used to recognize or establish an entity as being a particular person or thing, while “subject matter expertise” should be understood to refer to particular skill or knowledge that an individual has regarding a particular topic, or domain of activity or endeavor. Thus, to tie these concepts together, an example of determining a subset of questions by comparing a set of identifying information with a subject matter expertise associated with an individual would be the act of looking up how a login or password entered by an individual (an example of identifying information) was correlated with knowledge or experience that individual supposedly possessed (subject matter expertise) and selecting questions for presentation to the individual which were designed to obtain knowledge within the individual&#39;s knowledge or experience. Additionally, the term “context data” should be understood to refer to a set of data which can be used to influence the meaning or interpretation given to other data. An example of “context data” is the number of years an individual has worked in an industry associated with his or her employment (e.g., if the individual is employed as a human resources manager in the customer service department of an organization, the number of years the individual has worked in an industry associated with his or her employment could be the number of years the individual has worked as an HR manager, or the number of years the individual has worked in customer service). 
     Further variations on the computer readable media described above could also be implemented by those of ordinary skill in the art without undue experimentation in light of this disclosure. For example, for a computer readable medium which has stored thereon a set of instructions operable to configure a computer to determine a subset of questions for presentation to an individual, the instructions might further be operable to configure a second computer to present the subset of questions to the user via a response interface, and/or to store a set of response data in a non-volatile memory located remotely from the second computer. Additionally, for some such computer readable media, the set of instructions might be configured to be operable even in situations in which the second computer is located remotely from the computer. Further, in some implementations in which a set of instructions is operable to store a set of response data in a non-volatile memory located remotely from a second computer, the set of instructions might be implemented so as to store the response data in the non-volatile memory when the non-volatile memory is located remotely from the computer as well. 
     For the purpose of clarity, certain terms used in the above description should be understood as having particular meanings in the technological context of this disclosure. For example, a “response interface” should be understood to refer to displays, tools, or channels by which an individual can provide a response to a question. Non-limiting examples of response interfaces which could be used to provide a response, which could be expressed in a numeric format, include, sliders, radio buttons, and input forms. Similarly, a “non-volatile memory” should be understood to be a computer readable medium which retains data stored thereon even in the event that an external power source is disconnected or unavailable. Non-limiting examples of “non-volatile memory” include magnetic hard disks, flash drives, and optical discs. For further illustration, the statement that a set of instructions is operable to configure a second computer to store a set of response data in non-volatile memory located “remotely” from a second computer should be understood to mean that the set of instructions is operable to configure the second computer to cause the set of response data to be preserved in a non-volatile memory which is located at some distance away from the second computer (e.g., by transmitting the set of response data across a data network to a central server which would store the data). 
     Of course, computer readable media which could be implemented according to this disclosure could vary in terms of organization, in addition to, or as an alternative to varying in terms of operability of instructions. For example, in some computer readable media which store a plurality of questions relevant to a plurality of customer care capabilities, the customer care capabilities might be organized into a plurality of domains. Further each capability from the plurality of customer care capabilities might comprise a plurality of attributes, and each of the questions might be associated with a single attribute of a single capability of a single domain. For the purpose of clarity, when used in this context, a “domain” should be understood to refer to a category of activities, resources, goals or values which can be used to combine different capabilities for study and analysis. Similarly, an “attribute” should be understood to refer to a particular aspect of a capability. For example, the capability of talent acquisition might comprise the attributes of recruiting channel management (establishing and maximizing recruitment channels to attract and retain the right person, at the lowest cost, in the least amount of time), candidate pipeline management (ensuring a steady stream of quality and qualified applicants for anticipated labor resource requirements), and interviewing and selection processes (formalizing the methodology and driving accountability that will result in the best candidates to be hired by the organization). 
     As an example of how the organization of capabilities into domains might be implemented in some computer readable media using that organization, the plurality of domains might comprise business process alignment (leveraging customer interactions to drive business strategy and processes), talent management (identifying, hiring, developing, retaining and scheduling the right resources in the right roles), customer interaction (interacting with customers through the most effective and cost efficient paths), and care infrastructure (employing and managing the technologies and resources necessary to deliver consistent world-class support). Those domains might comprise pluralities of capabilities. For example, the domain of business process alignment might comprise two or more of the capabilities of business intelligence, customer driven strategy (e.g., using customer interaction data and lifetime value to optimize marketing, sales and service strategies), customer driven processes, customer driven products and services (e.g., using customer interaction data to define products and services aligned to customer expectations and/or to shorten the product development lifecycle), and knowledge management (e.g., processes such as creating, collecting, and distributing enterprise knowledge, which could be used for purposes such as creating a self-learning enterprise). Similarly, the domain of talent management might comprise two or more of the capabilities of talent acquisition (e.g., using interaction metrics to define sales or customer service agent profiles and/or actively using such profiles to define a recruiting strategy), talent alignment, talent training (e.g., using customer interaction data to define resource skill gaps, modularizing training, and/or designing the most effective training delivery channel), talent rewards and retention (e.g., aligning incentives such as salary, benefits, rewards and recognition to customer, market, and resource requirements), and workforce management (e.g., the ability to balance customer experience with effective use of enterprise resources). The domain of customer interaction might then comprise two or more of the capabilities of channel management (e.g., balancing between customer experience and enterprise costs, for example, by leveraging alternative marketing, sales, and service channels), integrated sales management (e.g., using customer sales interaction data to define the processes, tools, skills, alignment, and rewards in a manner which encompass sales and management functions of an organization), billing delivery (e.g., the delivery of accurate, timely, and easy to understand service charges; and/or management of service to cash processes), service delivery (e.g., the tools and methodologies used for defining, performing and resolving customer interactions in an effective manner), automated channel delivery (e.g., the processes and policies used to optimize the balance between customer experience and enterprise costs, such as by containing transitions in low(er) cost/automated channels), customer experience intelligence (e.g., an organization&#39;s leveraging customer interaction data to align interaction operational practices and tools with customer satisfaction and loyalty), and quality management (e.g., the definition and establishment of practices in aligning interaction effectiveness drivers with individual agents&#39; actions to improve program processes such as training and hiring). Finally, the last of the domains set forth above, care infrastructure, might comprise the capabilities of technology roadmapping (e.g., defining a technology strategy to drive return on investment on technology spend), application (e.g., defining an enterprise and customer facing tool set which could be used to drive profitability), technology architecture (e.g., defining the expansiveness, use, and integration of multiple integrated information assets), communication infrastructure (e.g., processes for managing telephony and network costs to balance service level agreements with overall customer service costs), security (e.g., defining an optimal balance between leveraging and protecting information assets), data management (e.g., the integrated collection, storage, use, and/or cleansing of customer data), physical environment (e.g., locating, securing, and managing the operational environment in a location where recruiting, retention, output efficiencies can occur), and systems integration (e.g., establishing clear project and program management goals and/or aligning technology consulting/strategy with on-time and on-budget delivery). 
     As an example of another computer readable medium which could be implemented by those of ordinary skill in the art in light of this disclosure, consider a computer readable medium having a data structure stored thereon. Such a data structure might comprise a first plurality of fields, with each field from the first plurality representing either a goal or a complexity lever, and a second plurality of fields, with each field from the second plurality representing a customer care capability. In such an implementation, each field which represents a goal might be associated with a goal weight, and each field representing a complexity lever might be associated with a complexity weight. Similarly, each field from the second plurality of fields might be associated with a worst case score for each field from the first plurality of fields. 
     For the purpose of clarity, certain terms used in the above description should be understood to have particular meanings in the technical context of this disclosure. For example, a “field” should be understood to refer to an element in a data structure which has a defined representation. For example, in a matrix data structure, the individual rows in that data structure would be fields which could be representative of individual units such as employees in an organization, or members in a social group. Additional examples which can be used to illustrate this concept are provided herein, though it should be understood that all such examples are intended to be illustrative, and not limiting on the scope of claims included in this application, or in future applications claiming the benefit of this application. Regarding the fields specifically described in the above paragraph, it should be understood that if a field represents a “goal” then the field represents some desired result or achievement for an organization. Similarly, if a field represents a “complexity lever”, then it should be understood that the field represents something which must be overcome, a cost which must be incurred, or an investment which must be made to achieve a goal. 
     To further clarify the description of a data structure set forth above, it should be understood that fields can be associated with various values, such as goal weights and complexity weights. For the purpose of clarity, it should be understood that a “goal weight” refers to a measure of the significance attributed to a particular goal, while a “complexity weight” refers to a measure of the significance attributed to a particular complexity lever. Further, it should be understood that a field might be associated with more than one value. For example, the statement that each field from a second plurality of fields is associated with a worst case score for each field from a first plurality of fields should be understood to mean that each individual field from the second plurality of fields is associated with some number of worst case scores, and that the number of worst case scores is no less than the number of fields in the first plurality of fields. Additionally, the statement that each field from the second plurality of fields is associated with a worst case score for each field from the first plurality of fields could also be restated as each field from the first plurality of fields is associated with a worst case score for each field from the second plurality of fields. A concrete example of such a relationship between fields in a data structure would be a two dimensional matrix, wherein each row is associated with at least one value for each column in the matrix, and each column in the matrix is associated with at least one value for each row in the matrix. Of course, this example is not intended to imply that all such multiple values associated with a field must be simultaneously associated with a second field in a data structure. For example, in some implementations, fields representing customer care capabilities might be associated with attributes, which might not themselves be associated with fields from any other plurality of fields. For additional clarification, further examples are provided herein. It should be understood that all such examples are intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting on the scope of claims included in this application, or claims which are included in future applications claiming the benefit of this application. 
     As an additional example of the types of data structures which could be implemented on computer readable media based on the teachings of this disclosure, it should be understood that in some data structures comprising a plurality of fields which, like the second plurality of fields described above, represents customer care capabilities, each field from that plurality of fields might be associated with a capability score and a capability rank variance. Further, in an implementation including data structures having such a plurality of fields, the fields from that plurality of fields might further be associated with an overall impact score and an overall complexity score. 
     In implementations comprising a computer readable medium which has a data structure comprising a first plurality of fields representing goals and complexity levers, and which has a second plurality of fields representing customer care capabilities and associated with overall complexity and impact scores stored thereon, there might be a variety of sets of data and techniques used as a basis for the overall complexity and impact scores. For example, in some implementations, an overall impact score associated with a field from the second plurality of fields might be based on a set of data comprising goal weights associated with the fields from the first plurality of fields which represent goals; worst case scores associated with the fields from the first plurality of fields which represent goals and further associated with the field from the second plurality of fields associated with the overall impact score; and the capability rank variance associated with the field from the second plurality of fields associated with the overall impact score. Similarly, the overall complexity score associated with a field from the second plurality of fields might be based on a set of data comprising: complexity weights associated with the fields from the first plurality of fields which represent complexity levers; the worst case scores associated with the fields from the first plurality of fields which represent complexity levers and with the field from the second plurality of fields associated with the overall complexity score; and the capability rank variance associated with the field from the second plurality of fields associated with the overall complexity score. 
     It should further be understood that computer readable media having data structures stored thereon could also store other information. For example, a computer readable medium having stored thereon a data structure such as described above might also have stored thereon a set of instructions operable to calculate a plurality of realistic scores for the fields from the second plurality of fields in the data structure. Each of those realistic scores might themselves be associated with a field from the first plurality of fields from the data structure. Such a set of instructions might be integrated into the data structure (as would be the case in, for example, a spreadsheet having embedded formulae for calculating one or more cell values) or could be stored externally to the data structure. Thus, the recitation of a computer readable medium having stored thereon both a data structure and a set of instructions should not be taken as limiting on the scope of claims included in this application or other applications claiming the benefit of this application, or on potential relationships between data structures and instruction sets which might be implemented based on this application by those of ordinary skill in the art. 
     As a further example of potential implementations of this disclosure, it should be understood that portions of this disclosure could be used to create a computer readable medium having stored thereon a set of computer executable instructions for calculating an overall impact score for an enhancement to a customer care capability of an organization based on the following formula: 
             O   =       ∑     i   =   1     n     ⁢           ⁢     (       W   i     *     I   i     *     (       C   var     *       (       S   max     /     (       S   max     -     S   min       )       )     /     I   range         )       )             
In that formula, O is the overall impact score, n is the number of goals in a plurality of goals relevant to the organization, W i  is a goal weight for the i th  goal in the plurality of goals, I i  is a worst case score for the i th  goal in the plurality of goals, C var  stands for a capability rank variance for the customer care capability, S max  stands for the maximum value on a scale used to measure a capability score for the customer care capability, S min  stands for the minimum value on the scale used to measure the capability score for the customer care capability, and I range  stands for the maximum value of a range used to express the worst case score I i .
 
     Of course, it should be understood that potential implementations of this application are not limited to computer readable media, whether having a data structure stored thereon or otherwise. As an example of an alternative type of implementation, it should be understood that a variety of methods could be practiced by those of ordinary skill in the art without undue experimentation in light of the teachings set forth herein. Such methods might include a variety of data or information gathering steps, such as collecting a set of data from one or more executives of an organization and/or obtaining a set of information by requesting that each individual from a plurality of identified subject matter experts complete a survey. In a method including such steps, the set of data collected from one or more executives might comprise a plurality of goals and complexity levers, while the survey completed by the subject matter experts might comprise a plurality of questions corresponding to one or more customer care capabilities from a plurality of customer care capabilities. 
     For the sake of clarity, certain terms used in the description above should be understood as having certain meanings in the technical context of this application. An “executive” should be understood as a person having authority for making strategic decisions in the context of an organization. “Collecting” a set of data from such people should be understood as bringing together, or gathering (potentially by eliciting) information from the executives. The verb “requesting” in the context of “obtaining a set of information by requesting” should be understood to refer to the act of asking, commanding or instructing that some act or group of acts take place which will result in the set of information being obtained. Similarly, to clarify the phrase “individual from a plurality of identified subject matter experts,” the term “identified subject matter expert” should be understood to refer to someone who has been determined to have a particular subject matter expertise. When such an individual is asked to “complete a survey comprising a plurality of questions,” it should be understood to mean that the subject matter expert is being asked to consider and answer to the best of his or her ability each question on the survey which is presented to him or her. It should be kept in mind that the subject matter expert might not be able to answer meaningfully each question, and that a survey in which some questions have been left unanswered for example, by making a “don&#39;t know” option or leaving a question blank could still be considered completed. The statement that the questions on such a survey “correspond to one or more customer capabilities from a plurality of customer care capabilities,” should be understood to mean that the questions on the survey are associated with the specific capabilities from the plurality of capabilities to which they are identified as “corresponding.” 
     Further refinements on methods which include data gathering and information collection steps such as set forth above could also be implemented according to the teachings of this application. For example, in some implementations in which a set of data is gathered from one or more executives of an organization, the set of data might comprise a goal list and a complexity lever list. Such a goal list could comprise a relative goal rank for each goal from the plurality of goals in the set of data gathered from the one or more executives, while the complexity lever list could comprise a relative complexity rank for each complexity lever from the plurality of complexity levers in the set of data gathered from the one or more executives. Similarly, a further refinement of a method which includes a step of obtaining a set of information could be to obtain a second set of information. Such an act could be achieved by performing one or more additional steps comprising requesting anecdotal data regarding the organization&#39;s customer care capabilities. As a further refinement which might take place in a method which comprises a step of obtaining a set of data by requesting that subject matter experts complete surveys comprising a plurality of questions corresponding to one or more customer care capabilities from a plurality of customer care capabilities, in some such methods there might be a step performed of defining the plurality of customer care capabilities by determining, from a list of potential customer care capabilities, two or more customer care capabilities which are relevant to the organization which employs the subject matter experts. Of course, it should be understood that the refinements described above, as well as additional refinements which are discussed herein, are intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting on the scope of claims included in this application, or which are included in future applications claiming the benefit of this application. 
     For the purpose of clarity, certain terms used above in describing the refinements should be understood as having particular meanings in the technical context of this application. For example, the term “list,” as used in the context of a “goal list” or a “complexity lever list” should be understood to refer to an enumerated group of elements (e.g., goals, or complexity levers) having a definite and knowable membership (though such membership might be modified by adding elements to, or removing elements from, the list) which is expressed in a human perceptible form (e.g., written as words on a piece of paper). Similarly, a “relative rank” should be understood to refer to a position or standing on some scale in comparison to other entities also represented on that scale. Additionally, data referred to as “anecdotal” data should be understood to be data which is based on personal observations, case study reports, or accounts of particular events, incidents or experiences. 
     Of course, it should further be understood that methods which could be implemented in light of the teachings of this application are not limited to data gathering or information collection steps such as described above. For example, some methods which could be implemented based on the teachings of this application might include, either in addition to, or as an alternative to, one or more of the steps described previously, steps such as: determining a goal weight for each goal from a plurality of goals; determining a complexity weight for each complexity lever from a plurality of complexity levers; and deriving a plurality of scores for each of the capabilities from a plurality of customer care capabilities. Additionally, determining or deriving steps might be linked with the data gathering and information collection steps as described previously. For example, in methods where a set of information is collected by requesting that subject matter experts complete surveys, the plurality of scores derived for each capability might comprise a plurality of realistic scores based on that set of information. Similarly, in some implementations in which a plurality of scores are derived for each capability from a plurality of customer care capabilities, that derivation might comprise utilizing a database to determine a plurality of worst case scores for each of the capabilities from the plurality of customer care capabilities. Further, some such methods might comprise the additional step of updating the database based on worst case scores for each capability from the plurality of customer care capabilities. 
     As has heretofore been the case, certain terms used in the description above should be understood as having particular meanings in the technical context of this application. For example, the verb “derive” (and various forms thereof) should be understood to refer to an act of determining something from one or more inputs. The term “score” should be understood to refer to a symbol, appellation, or sign used as a measurement. Similarly, the term “database” should be understood to refer to a collection data having a definite and knowable scope. It should be understood, of course, that the scope of a database, while knowable, is potentially not fixed, as a “database” can be “updated,” where “updating” refers to the act of making a modification. 
     Continuing with the description of various methods which could be implemented by those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this application, in some instances, a method implemented according to the teachings of this application might comprise, either in addition to, or in alternative to, one or more of the steps described above, the steps of prioritizing an enhancement for each customer care capability from a plurality of customer care capabilities; and presenting a set of results based at least in part on that prioritization of enhancements. Further, in some situations the prioritization might be based on a set of factors comprising: goal weights for a plurality of goals; complexity weights for a plurality of complexity levers; and a plurality of realistic scores derived for the capability for which the enhancement is being prioritized. 
     For the sake of clarity, certain terms used in the description above should be understood as having particular meanings in the technical context of this application. For example, the term “enhancement,” in the context of an “enhancement” for “a customer care capability” should be understood to refer to an upgrade, improvement, or policy designed to make the particular customer care capability better in some way. It should be understood that, while an “enhancement” could refer to a specific proposal (e.g., purchase a particular software package to enhance the capability of technology roadmapping), an “enhancement” could also refer to a more generalized initiative to improve a capability (e.g., a decision to invest additional resources to determine the most effective way that a capability could be changed for the better). For additional clarification, the verb “prioritize” (and various forms thereof) should be understood to refer to the act of assigning something a place in a scale. To say that a prioritization is “based on a set of factors” should be understood to mean that the assignment of the thing being prioritized is founded on the set of elements information or data referred to as “factors.” Additionally, the statement that “a set of results is based at least in part on a prioritization” should be understood to mean that some aspect of a group of one or more conclusions is founded on the prioritization. 
     Of course, the methods described above are not intended to be, and should not be treated as, exhaustive on the potential methods which could implemented by those of ordinary skill in the art in light of this disclosure. For example, in some methods where both a first set of information, and a second set of information are obtained, and results are presented based on a prioritization of enhancements to customer care capabilities, the presenting of the results might comprise presenting the prioritization of the enhancements to the customer care capabilities, and identifying one or more discrepancies between the first and second sets of information. Additionally, in some such methods, presenting the set of results might also comprise presenting a display depicting an organization&#39;s practices in the plurality of customer care capabilities relative to industry standard practices. 
     For the purpose of understanding the description set forth above, certain terms used therein should be treated as having particular meanings in the technical context of this application. For example, a “discrepancy” should be understood to refer to a divergence, disagreement, or inconsistency between two things. Similarly, the term “display” in the context of the phrase “presenting a display” should be understood to refer to a visual representation of data, for example, in the form of a chart, a list, a slide, a graph, or some other manner which can be visually perceived. When a “display” is described as “depicting an organization&#39;s practices,” it should be understood that the “display” presents data which is derived from, and representative of, the practices of the organization. It should further be understood that, while the display might present the practices themselves, it could also present data which does not necessarily directly convey the practices (e.g., the display might present numeric scores representing a measurement of the practices of the organization on some scale). The statement that the display depicts the practices relative to “industry standard practices” should be understood to mean that the display presents a representation of the practices which is in comparison (e.g., by placing two measurements on a scale) with practices which are the most usual or common in the industry. 
     Other variations, implementations, and uses can be practiced by those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the disclosure of this application without undue experimentation. For example, while the above descriptions focused on various methods and computer readable media which could be implemented based on the teachings of this application, this application also enables the implementation of additional and alternative methods and computer readable media, as well as systems, apparatuses and other implementations which may be appropriate to particular circumstances. Thus, it should be understood that the descriptions set forth above, as well as the remainder of the material set forth herein is intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
         FIG. 1  depicts a sequence of events which might take place in the process of prioritizing and presenting recommendations regarding an organization&#39;s customer care capabilities. 
         FIG. 2  depicts a system which could be used in gathering raw data through computerized surveys. 
         FIG. 3   a  depicts a capability selection screen which could be used in a computerized survey tool. 
         FIG. 3   a - 1  depicts a capability selection screen which could be used in a computerized survey tool. 
         FIG. 3   b  depicts a data entry screen which could be used in a computerized survey tool. 
         FIG. 3   c  depicts a capability selection screen which could be used in a computerized survey tool. 
         FIG. 3   c - 1  depicts a capability selection screen which could be used in a computerized survey tool. 
         FIG. 3   d  depicts a data entry screen which could be used in a computerized survey tool. 
         FIGS. 4   a - 1  to  4   e - 2  depict spreadsheets which could be used in the prioritization of capability enhancements. 
         FIG. 5  depicts a process of randomizing questions presented to a subject matter expert. 
         FIG. 6  depicts a graph showing relative impacts and complexities for various capability enhancements. 
         FIG. 7  depicts a graphic presenting an organization&#39;s standing relative to industry practices. 
         FIG. 8  depicts an interface which could be used for the analysis of data. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION 
     This disclosure sets forth various techniques which can be used in the prioritization and presentation of enhancements to the customer care capabilities of an organization. For the sake of clarity, this disclosure is organized around an illustrative process, depicted in  FIG. 1 , for prioritizing and presenting enhancements to an organization&#39;s customer care capabilities. However, while the discussion is structured according to the process of  FIG. 1 , it should be understood that those of ordinary skill in the art will be able to practice the teachings of this disclosure in manners which diverge from the process set forth in  FIG. 1  without undue experimentation. Therefore, the discussion herein should be understood as being illustrative only, and not limiting on the scope of claims which are set forth in this application, or which are included in future applications which claim the benefit of this application. 
     In the illustrative process depicted in  FIG. 1 , prioritizing and presenting enhancements to an organization&#39;s customer care capabilities starts with an initial data collection step [ 101 ]. As shown in  FIG. 1 , this initial data collection [ 101 ] is used to obtain information which will be used to contextualize and evaluate information for the purpose of prioritizing and presenting capability enhancements. It should be understood that, while the diagram of  FIG. 1  depicts the initial data collection [ 101 ] as a unitary step, there may be a broad variety of techniques which could be used in the initial data collection [ 101 ]. For example, in a scenario in which a consultant uses the process depicted in  FIG. 1  for evaluating an organization&#39;s customer care capabilities, the initial data collection [ 101 ] could be comprised of an interview with executives of the organization which is being evaluated, during which the consultant could ask questions designed to elicit information regarding goals and complexity levers for the organization. Depending on factors such as the expertise of the executives participating in the interview, the expertise of the consultant, and any constraints on the organization&#39;s interaction with the consultant, some techniques for eliciting information might be more appropriate than others. For example, in a scenario in which a consultant seeks to minimize the time expended in the initial data collection [ 101 ], he or she might simply ask the executives to identify goals and complexity levers for the organization, and then ask the executives to rank those goals and complexity levers in terms of their importance to the organization. Alternatively, in a scenario in which executives might not be able or willing to simply identify goals and complexity levers, the consultant might enter into a discussion with the executives during which information regarding goals and complexity levers could be identified. For example, the consultant might seek to elicit useful information by asking questions in terms which the executives are likely to understand and relate to, such as financial impacts (e.g., how are the executives planning on increasing revenue? What are the largest recurring costs for designing new products? What is the average cost of training new call center agents? Etc.). Similarly, the consultant might break down different types of goals the organization might have in order to make it easier for the executives to identify goals (e.g., what are the overall goals of the organization? What are the executives&#39; operational goals from a customer services perspective? What are the executives&#39; goals for the specific interaction with the consultant? Etc.). Of course, mixed strategies are also possible. For example, instead of simply asking executives to identify and rank goals and complexity levers, a consultant might ask the executives to identify and rank goals and complexity levers, but also explain how the rankings will be used in prioritizing capability enhancements for the organization. A consultant might also provide the executives with exemplary goals and complexity levers, either as a form of pump priming (i.e., with the intent of stimulating the executives to think in terms of goals and complexity levers) or as a worksheet (i.e., the consultant would provide a list of goals and complexity levers, and the executives would rank the provided goals and complexity levers according to their importance to the organization, or indicate that a particular goal or complexity lever is not applicable). 
     Of course, it should be understood that, while the discussion of the initial data collection [ 101 ] described various techniques which could be used by a consultant in an interview with an organization&#39;s executives, the initial data collection [ 101 ] is not limited to consultant based techniques. For example, in a scenario in which it is not feasible for a consultant to interview executives (e.g., the executives might be widely dispersed, or the organization might be a small organization which seeks to minimize costs as much as possible) the initial data collection [ 101 ] might take place through the use of surveys, which list potential goals and complexity levers and request that the survey participants (e.g., executives) rank the goals and complexity levers. Exemplary goals and complexity levers which could be used in such a survey are set forth below in tables 1 and 2. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 1 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Exemplary Goals 
               
               
                 Goals 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                 Decrease Abandon Rate 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Improve Scheduling Effectiveness 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Decrease Cost Per Contact 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Improve Data Analysis 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Increase Customer Insight (Internal) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Increase Customer Insight (External) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Improve Operational Performance 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Improve Agent Performance 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Improve Management Structure 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Increase Customer Satisfaction 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Increase Agent Retention 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Execute Contact Center Consolidation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 2 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Exemplary Complexity Levers 
               
               
                 Complexity Levers 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                 Resource Availability 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HR Infrastructure Needed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Training Time Needed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Capital Expense 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Operational Requirements 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Sponsorship Requirements 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Scope of Change 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Of course, it should be understood that tables above are intended to be illustrative only of goals and complexity levers which could be used in the context of this disclosure, and is not intended to be limiting on the scope of any claims included in this application, or which are included in future applications claiming the benefit of this application. 
     Combined approaches could be used as well. For example, an organization might initially distribute surveys, and include in the surveys an option for the participants to indicate if they felt that there were goals and/or complexity levers for their organization which were not included in the survey. If the participants indicated that there were goals and complexity levers which were not included in the survey, or they expressed dissatisfaction with the survey in some other regard, a consultant might be dispatched to augment the surveys with interviews or other data collection techniques. As a second example of a combined technique, a consultant could initially interview executives to identify goals and complexity levers, then use the identified goals and complexity levers to build a databank from which later surveys could be drawn. Other techniques, and variations and combinations of the techniques described could also be practiced by one of ordinary skill in the art without undue experimentation in light of this disclosure. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 1 , after the initial data collection [101], the goals and complexity levers are weighed [102]. The weighing of goals and complexity levers [102] refers to the process of assigning values to the goals and complexity levers which can be used for later calculation and data analysis. As with the initial data collection [101], the weighing of goals and complexity levers [102] can proceed according to a variety of techniques. For example, in an implementation in which the initial data collection [101] yields a list of goals and complexity levers in rank order, weighing goals and complexity levers [102] can be accomplished by assigning the goals and complexity levers weights on a predetermined scale with the weights following a selected statistical distribution. An example of such statistical weighing is set forth in table 3, where 12 goals are assigned weights on a scale of 1 to 5 reflecting an approximately normal distribution. 
                                   TABLE 3                   Normal Goal Weighing                Goal   Value                       Goal 1   5           Goal 2   4           Goal 3   4           Goal 4   4           Goal 5   3           Goal 6   3           Goal 7   3           Goal 8   3           Goal 9   2           Goal 10   2           Goal 11   2           Goal 12   1                        
Of course, it should be understood that assigning weights according to a normal distribution is not the only technique which can be used in weighing goals and complexity levers [ 102 ]. For example, other statistical distributions, such as skewed normal distributions, student t distributions, Poisson distributions, or other distributions as might be appropriate for a given implementation or scenario can also be used. Further, the step of weighing goals and complexity levers [ 102 ] might not use a statistical distribution at all. For example, in a case where the initial data collection [ 101 ] comprises a consultant interviewing executives to identify goals and complexity levers, the weights might be assigned by the consultant based on information gathered during the interview (e.g., goals the executives explicitly state are of paramount priority could be given a high score, while goals the executives explicitly state are of secondary importance might be given low scores). It is also possible that the weighing of goals and complexity levers [ 102 ] could use a combined technique. For example, weights could be tentatively assigned according to a statistical distribution (e.g., a normal distribution, as shown in table 1), and then the tentative weights could be adjusted by a consultant based on information gathered during the initial data collection [ 101 ]. Alternatively, a consultant could initially assign weights to the goals and complexity levers, then evaluate the assignment of weights against a statistical distribution (e.g., evaluation against a normal distribution to ensure that there are not an excessive number of high and/or low weights assigned). Variations on and from the above described techniques are also possible. Thus, it should be understood that the techniques described herein are intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting on the scope of claims included in this application, or other claims which claim the benefit of this application.
 
     Additionally, it should be understood that, while the illustrative process of  FIG. 1  depicts the initial data collection [ 101 ] and the weighing of goals and complexity levers [ 102 ] as separate steps, that separation is depicted for the sake of illustration only, and should not be treated as limiting. It is contemplated that, in light of this disclosure, one of ordinary skill in the art could, without undue experimentation, practice a method which combines the initial data collection [ 101 ] and the weighing of goals and complexity levers [ 102 ]. This combination could be made, for example, by modifying an initial data collection [ 101 ] performed by a consultant interviewing executives such that, instead of the executives providing a list of goals and complexity levers in rank order, the executives themselves would provide a weighted list of goals and complexity levers. This list could then be modified by the consultant (e.g., in a case where the executives provide weights which are in conflict with past weights provided by similar organizations, the consultant might modify the weights before using them for calculation), or it could be used in its unmodified form for prioritizing and presenting capability enhancements. Similarly, the surveys described above could be modified so that the executives would provide goals and complexity levers with weights, as opposed to in order. Thus, it should be remembered that the process of  FIG. 1 , in addition to the sub-steps depicted in that process, is intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting. 
     Returning to  FIG. 1 , after weighing the goals and complexity levers [ 102 ], the process shown in that figure continues with a secondary data collection [ 103 ]. As shown in  FIG. 1 , the secondary data collection [ 103 ] is comprised of two sub-steps, collecting raw data [ 104 ], and collecting normalized data [ 105 ]. For the purpose of clarity, the sub-steps of collecting raw data [ 104 ] and collecting normalizing data [ 105 ] will be discussed below separately. However, it should be understood that the inventors contemplate that prioritization and presentation of capability enhancements can be made without subdividing the secondary data collection [ 103 ] into distinct sub-steps as shown in  FIG. 1 . Thus, the discussion of the secondary data collection [ 103 ] should be understood as illustrative only of a technique which can be used in the process of prioritizing and presenting capability enhancements, and should not be understood as limiting on the scope of claims included in this application, or on the scope of claims included in other applications claiming the benefit of this application. 
     First, the sub-step of collecting raw data [ 104 ] as shown in  FIG. 1  refers to the process of collecting data which will subsequently be used to prioritize capability enhancements. Various techniques can be employed to collect the raw data [ 104 ]. For example, raw data can be collected using surveys distributed to individuals identified as being knowledgeable in specific capability areas. The individuals to whom the surveys are given could be identified in a number of manners. For example, they might have been identified as part of the initial data collection [ 101 ], or they might have been identified according to their job title (e.g., the head of a particular department might be presumed to be an expert in subject matter relevant to that department). Alternatively, the surveys might be distributed to groups of employees of the organization, or to randomly selected employees fitting defined profiles, or using various other techniques which might be appropriate in a given scenario. Additional variations are also possible. For example, where the step of collecting raw data [ 104 ] is performed by distributing surveys, the surveys might be distributed through a variety of techniques, such as paper survey distribution, email survey distribution, distribution of survey applications to employee computers, and creation of a browser based survey tool which allows users to take surveys remotely. For purposes of illustration, an exemplary computerized survey technique is described below. 
     For the purpose of this example, assume that the individuals who will be taking the surveys are subject matter experts (SMEs) who were identified as such during an initial data collection [ 101 ]. Assume further that the physical system which will be used to distribute the surveys utilizes the architecture as shown in  FIG. 2 , in which a server [ 201 ] is connected to a plurality of remote computers [ 203 ][ 204 ][ 205 ] through a network [ 202 ]. In a system such as shown in  FIG. 2 , the surveys could be provided based on software stored at the server [ 201 ] which configures the server [ 201 ] to provide survey questions to a remote computer (e.g., [ 203 ]) when an authorized user logs onto the server [ 201 ] using the remote computer (e.g., [ 203 ]). The SMEs can be identified as authorized individuals using a variety of techniques. For example, the SMEs could be issued unique login IDs and/or passwords which the server [ 201 ] can use for identification. Another technique which could be used to ensure that the SMEs are recognized as authorized individuals would be to assign specific computers (e.g., remote computers [ 203 ][ 204 ][ 205 ]) to specific SMEs, so that when a computer attempts to log into the server, it will be assumed that the user of that computer is the appropriate SME. Yet another technique which could be used to ensure that the SMEs are recognized as authorized individuals is to issue each SME a physical token (e.g., a dongle) which the SME would connect to a computer used to access the server [ 201 ] that would identify the SME as an authorized individual. Of course, such techniques are provided only for the purpose of illustration, and are not intended to be limiting on the scope of claims included in this application, or which are included in other applications which claim the benefit of this application. 
     Continuing with the discussion of a computerized survey tool, once an SME has used a remote computer [ 203 ][ 204 ][ 205 ] to log into the server [ 201 ], the server [ 201 ] would provide the SME with a capability selection screen, and example of which is set forth in  FIG. 3   a . In  FIG. 3   a , a capability selection screen is presented in which the SME is given the option of choosing a particular capability that the individual wishes to answer questions about. It should be noted that, in some implementations, the capability selection screen might limit the choices presented to the SME. For instance, if the SME is a mid-level manager in the human resources department of a business, he or she might be presented with a capability selection screen as shown in  FIG. 3   a - 1 , which limits the questions available to the SME to those which are within his or her identified area of expertise. Such limitation might be determined on a case by case basis, or could be based on an organization which is broadly applicable to customer care across organizations. One such broadly applicable organization is one in which capabilities are grouped within domains, and in which the capabilities themselves are separated into distinct attributes is shown in tables 4-7, below. 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 4 
               
             
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Exemplary Organization of a Business Process Alignment Domain 
               
             
          
           
               
                 DOMAIN 
                 CAPABILITY 
                 ATTRIBUTE 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 BUSINESS 
                 BUSINESS 
                 Modeling 
               
               
                 PROCESS 
                 INTELLIGENCE 
                 Data Analytics and Management 
               
               
                 ALIGNMENT 
                   
                 Enterprise Agility 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Value Driven Program Planning 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Enterprise Performance Management 
               
               
                   
                 CUSTOMER  
                 Customer Valuation &amp; Optimization 
               
               
                   
                 DRIVEN 
                 Decisioning Management 
               
               
                   
                 STRATEGY 
                 Market Mix Optimization 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Service Delivery Optimization 
               
               
                   
                 CUSTOMER  
                 Process Definition &amp; Modeling 
               
               
                   
                 DRIVEN 
                 Value Driven Process Metrics 
               
               
                   
                 PROCESSES 
                 Process Management 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Leading Practice Management 
               
               
                   
                 CUSTOMER  
                 Product Development Lifecycle 
               
               
                   
                 DRIVEN 
                 Pricing Optimization 
               
               
                   
                 PRODUCTS &amp; 
                 Product Mix Optimization 
               
               
                   
                 SERVICES 
                 Marketing Definition, Development &amp;  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Deployment 
               
               
                   
                 KNOWLEDGE 
                 Self Learning Organization 
               
               
                   
                 MANAGEMENT 
                 Knowledge Repository 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Leading M&amp;P Definition &amp;  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Deployment 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 5 
               
             
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Exemplary Organization of a Talent Management Domain 
               
             
          
           
               
                 DOMAIN 
                 CAPABILITY 
                 ATTRIBUTE 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 TALENT 
                 TALENT 
                 Profile Development 
               
               
                 MANAGE- 
                 ACQUISITION 
                 Recruiting Channel Management 
               
               
                 MENT 
                   
                 Candidate Pipeline Management 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Interviewing and Selection Process 
               
               
                   
                 TALENT  
                 Customer Alignment 
               
               
                   
                 ALIGNMENT 
                 Customer Care Culture 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Career Pathing 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Organizational Design &amp;  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Development 
               
               
                   
                 TALENT TRAINING 
                 Curriculum Development 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Onboarding Process 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Training Deployment 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Training Metric Management 
               
               
                   
                 TALENT REWARDS 
                 Incentive Structure 
               
               
                   
                 &amp; RETENTION 
                 Benefits Structure 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Non-Monetary Recognition 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Retention Management 
               
               
                   
                 WORKFORCE 
                 Performance Management 
               
               
                   
                 MANAGEMENT 
                 Management Dashboard 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Forecasting, Scheduling,  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Intra-Day Management 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Human Event Management 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 6 
               
             
             
               
                   
               
               
                 Exemplary Organization of a Customer Interaction Domain 
               
             
          
           
               
                 DOMAIN 
                 CAPABILITY 
                 ATTRIBUTE 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 CUSTOMER 
                 CHANNEL 
                 Partner Relationship Management 
               
               
                 INTERACTION 
                 MANAGEMENT 
                 Integrated Customer Data  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Management 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Integrated Workflow Management 
               
               
                   
                 INTEGRATED  
                 Sales Force Alignment 
               
               
                   
                 SALES 
                 Opportunity Management 
               
               
                   
                 MANAGEMENT 
                 Transaction Management 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Post Sales Support 
               
               
                   
                 BILLING  
                 Billing Strategy &amp; Approach 
               
               
                   
                 DELIVERY 
                 Rating 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cycle Management 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Promotion Management 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Revenue Assurance 
               
               
                   
                 SERVICE  
                 Routing 
               
               
                   
                 DELIVERY 
                 Contact Handling 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Resolution Workflow Management 
               
               
                   
                 AUTOMATED 
                 Voice 
               
               
                   
                 CHANNEL  
                 Web &amp; Chat 
               
               
                   
                 DELIVERY 
                 Email 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Live Agent 
               
               
                   
                 CUSTOMER 
                 Voice of the Customer Integration 
               
               
                   
                 EXPERIENCE 
                 Survey Sampling Methodology 
               
               
                   
                 INTELLIGENCE 
                 Questionnaire Design 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Voice of the Customer Reporting 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Data Integration and Linkage  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Analysis 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Voice of the Customer Process  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Alignment 
               
               
                   
                 QUALITY 
                 Quality Monitoring Process 
               
               
                   
                 MANAGEMENT 
                 Quality Feedback Process 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Quality Monitoring Metrics 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
                                   TABLE 7                   Exemplary Organization of a Care Infrastructure Domain            DOMAIN   CAPABILITY   ATTRIBUTE               CARE   TECHNOLOGY   Technology Roadmap       INFRA-   ROADMAPPING   Alignment with Business Strategy       STRUCTURE       Human Factors Engineering               Business Continuity Planning           APPLICATION   Application Design               Integrated View of Customer               Analytic Decisioning           TECHNOLOGY   Business Rules Management Systems           ARCHITECTURE   Service Oriented Architecture               External Network (Customer Facing)               Network Convergence               Disaster Recovery Planning               Home Agent           COMMUNI-   Communications Network            CATIONS   Infrastructure           INFRA-   Sourcing Optimization           STRUCTURE   Vendor Selection               Network Performance Management               Capacity Management               Communications Expense                Management           SECURITY   Security Approach               Information and Technology               People &amp; Facilities           DATA   Data Governance           MANAGEMENT   Data Quality Management               Data Enhancement               Data Privacy               Data Compliance Management               Integration Competency Centers           PHYSICAL   Design           ENVIRONMENT   Physical Surroundings               Site Selection               Facilities Management               Homeshoring           SYSTEMS   Integration Methodology           INTEGRATION   Requirements Management               Implementation Support               Program/Project Management               Quality Assurance Management               Maintenance and Operations Support                    
Of course, it should be understood that the organization represented by tables 4-7 is intended to be illustrative only of a type of organization which could be used consistent with the teachings of this disclosure, and is not intended to be limiting, either on claims included in this application, or on claims included in other applications claiming the benefit of this application.
 
     Continuing with the discussion of the exemplary computer-based survey tool, once the individual taking the survey has selected a capability, the system presents a response interface as shown in  FIG. 3   b . As shown in  FIG. 3   b , the response interface presents a plurality of questions [ 301 ][ 302 ][ 303 ] to a user. The questions themselves could be stored on the server [ 201 ] in a manner which reflects the questions&#39; semantic content. For example, using a domain/capability organization of the type shown in tables 4-7 and the capability selection screens of  FIGS. 3   a  and  3   a - 1 , the questions themselves might be stored in contiguous memory in a database on the server [ 201 ], with the memory itself organized into domains and capabilities, for example, in the manner of tables 8-11 set forth below: 
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 8 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Exemplary organization of questions and exemplars associated with attributes and capabilities of a 
               
               
                 business process alignment domain 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Customer 
                 To what degree does your organization calculate Customer Lifetime Value? 
               
               
                 Valuation &amp; 
                 1 - Customer lifetime value calculations are limited due to complexity of calculations or 
               
               
                 Optimization 
                 lack of reliable input data, or both. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer lifetime value is done with initial rough calculations which include direct 
               
               
                   
                 costs but indirect revenue is not considered. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer lifetime value is a critical ongoing assessment. Calculations include 
               
               
                   
                 initial revenue, initial cost (acquisition and product), future revenue (incremental 
               
               
                   
                 purchase, service and support), future costs (incremental sales and product costs and 
               
               
                   
                 ongoing service and support costs), loyalty (retention rate), and influence value. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree does your company perform lifetime value calculations to customer 
               
               
                   
                 segmentation? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - A single lifetime value calculation is done across all customers. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Lifetime value calculations are performed on a typical customer within a segment to 
               
               
                   
                 understand the relative value of the entire segment against other segments. 
               
               
                   
                 Segmentation does not change based on lifetime value calculations. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Lifetime value calculations are performed at the individual level and customers are 
               
               
                   
                 grouped into segments based on relative value. Segmentation may change as lifetime 
               
               
                   
                 value is reassessed. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your company apply customer lifetime value calculations and analysis? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Minimal use of customer lifetime value analysis causes interactions to be focused 
               
               
                   
                 on customers who are the biggest in terms of sales volume, demand the most service 
               
               
                   
                 or are easiest to market products or services 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer lifetime value analysis is used to create differentiated treatment for 
               
               
                   
                 customer segments as a component of the customer interaction strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer lifetime value analysis is used as insight to retain the most valuable 
               
               
                   
                 customers, identify, target customers from competitors, better focus on CRM 
               
               
                   
                 deployments, create marketing campaigns and fine tune the customer interaction 
               
               
                   
                 strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your company have a strategy for differentiated service for different levels of 
               
               
                   
                 customers? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer interaction strategy is defined by company culture of treating customers 
               
               
                   
                 equally with no differentiation of treatment. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer interaction strategy is to provide differentiated treatment based on entire 
               
               
                   
                 customer segment value only. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer interaction strategy is to provide differentiated treatment based on 
               
               
                   
                 segmentation defined by individual lifetime value of the customer. 
               
               
                 Desisioning 
                 Which of the following best describes how your organization uses predictive analytics? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - Manual analysis is performed on historical data and limited by policies and 
               
               
                   
                 procedures documentation. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Predictive analytics are used to predict likely future results from historical data, 
               
               
                   
                 business rules are applied manually to decision making processes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Dedicated business rules management technology and advanced predictive 
               
               
                   
                 analytics serve as the common infrastructure across multiple processes and decision 
               
               
                   
                 types (strategic and operational). 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the general analysis methodology and tools used 
               
               
                   
                 in your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Analyses are based on intuition and personal biases as limited data is available. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Analyses are created manually with minimal consideration for resource constraints 
               
               
                   
                 and limited ability to account for uncertainty. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Analyses are modeled using visualization tools to understand the best strategy by 
               
               
                   
                 adjusting variables and forecasting outcomes while balancing multiple business 
               
               
                   
                 objectives and resource constraints while accounting for ranges of uncertainty. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how information is presented to the agent to 
               
               
                   
                 enable decision making while interacting with a customer? 
               
               
                   
                 1- Information retrieval requires specific queries from multiple systems. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Systems facilitate routine data searches and retrieval but are contained in multiple 
               
               
                   
                 systems. 
               
               
                   
                 5 -Information is quickly presented in a single contextually relevant format. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how quickly an agent can make an informed 
               
               
                   
                 decision about a customer&#39;s situation? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Decisions timeframes are lengthy and are often made after the customer interaction 
               
               
                   
                 transaction has occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Excessive effort is needed to research and reach a decision during the customer 
               
               
                   
                 interaction transaction. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Decisions are facilitated during the customer interaction transaction. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your organization monitor and analyze the customer interaction 
               
               
                   
                 decisioning processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer interactions and relevant decisions are not monitored and analyzed. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - No formal feedback mechanism in place for enterprise-wide decision performance 
               
               
                   
                 analysis. Feedback may be received through individual business units but is not used 
               
               
                   
                 to refine strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer interactions and relevant decisions are monitored in real-time and results 
               
               
                   
                 are reported in order to refine strategy, the decision model and assumptions. 
               
               
                 Market Mix 
                 Which of the following best describes how markets are defined and how messages are 
               
               
                 Optimization 
                 targeted to those markets? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Single target market with undifferentiated messaging. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Multiple target markets identified with some differentiation in messaging but only at 
               
               
                   
                 a very high level. (e.g., industry, customer types, total revenues) 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Multiple distinct target markets defined in detail with specific criteria of why each are 
               
               
                   
                 a viable, appropriate market/customer segment. Differentiated product messaging and 
               
               
                   
                 value propositions for each. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s ability to match products to 
               
               
                   
                 their corresponding target markets? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is limited ability to match existing products, benefits and features and value 
               
               
                   
                 levers to markets or segments. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Specific matching of product set features, benefits, and value levers to provide 
               
               
                   
                 differentiated value for some but not all segments. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is explicit, systematic matching of various product offerings, features, 
               
               
                   
                 benefits and value levers to specifically drive value for individual target markets and 
               
               
                   
                 segments. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree is your organization able to tailor a pricing strategy for individual 
               
               
                   
                 products and product bundles targeted for specific customer segments? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Pricing strategy does not incorporate product or segment differentiation nor bundled 
               
               
                   
                 product profitability considerations. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Pricing strategy aligns with emerging differentiated treatment of customer 
               
               
                   
                 segments. Holistic view into profitability of segments or product bundling is applied in 
               
               
                   
                 some but not all segments. Profitability considerations across segments is emerging. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Pricing strategy is fully tailored to product and bundling needs of specific target 
               
               
                   
                 segments. Additionally, holistic profitability considerations applied both within and 
               
               
                   
                 across segments and incorporated into strategic customer support decisions. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe the mechanism by which your organization gets feedback from 
               
               
                   
                 the (customer) market? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Feedback mechanisms are informal. There is limited opportunity to validate 
               
               
                   
                 whether feedback applies to all similar customers. Very limited feedback to marketing 
               
               
                   
                 or product development. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Feedback mechanisms are formalized and functioning for some products or 
               
               
                   
                 customer segments but not all. Incorporation of information into marketing or 
               
               
                   
                 development changes are ad-hoc, and not always timely. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Feedback mechanisms are formalized and functioning consistently for all customer 
               
               
                   
                 segments and rolls into defined metrics which are utilized to enable real-time 
               
               
                   
                 adjustments to marketing messaging as well as product development. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your organization gather market intelligence? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Market intelligence is not an emphasis item and performed on an ad-hoc bases. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Market intelligence is a key emphasis item but only applied to certain product 
               
               
                   
                 segments or within certain business units. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Market intelligence is a competitive differentiator and holistically evaluated across 
               
               
                   
                 product sets, segments and business units. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your organization use and apply the gathered market intelligence? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is minimal competitive analysis or customer predictive behavior analysis 
               
               
                   
                 based on findings. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Formal competitive analysis is incorporated into customer and market predictive 
               
               
                   
                 analysis, however it does not always successfully influence future strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Robust competitive analysis and customer predictive analysis capabilities (future 
               
               
                   
                 needs of the marketplace) are regularly applied. Findings systematically incorporated 
               
               
                   
                 into future strategy. 
               
               
                 Service 
                 What criteria does your company observe to develop a customer service strategy? 
               
               
                 Delivery 
                 1 - Company defines customer service strategy based on product development and 
               
               
                 Optimization 
                 marketing segmentation. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer service strategy is defined based on experience and refined based on 
               
               
                   
                 reaction to needs of customers. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer service strategy is defined based upon current and anticipated needs of 
               
               
                   
                 customer segments and feature and functionality demands of those segments. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree does your organization define its desired customer service experience? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Little formalized guidance, expectations or policies on a desired customer 
               
               
                   
                 experience results in varied customer treatment across service channels. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Organization provides sufficient guidance and structure to design service channels 
               
               
                   
                 which meet the customer service experience requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Service channels are designed to exceed the desired customer service experience. 
               
               
                   
                 Additionally agents are motivated to evolve beyond normal empowerment. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization differentiate its service levels (for customers)? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer value profiles are not defined and cost of service is not a factor in 
               
               
                   
                 determining level of service. Service strategy is one size fits all with no service level 
               
               
                   
                 differentiation. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Market segmentation and relative cost to serve each market segment is used to 
               
               
                   
                 create rudimentary service level differentiation. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer value profiles and analysis of cost to serve (including comprehensive 
               
               
                   
                 understanding of time to serve) drive service level differentiation by customers 
               
               
                   
                 segment. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s service channel 
               
               
                   
                 infrastructure? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customers must adapt to available service channels. Minimal investments in 
               
               
                   
                 alternate service delivery methods. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Investments in alternate service channels is driven by perceived needs of the entire 
               
               
                   
                 customer base. Customers are incented to utilize the most cost effective delivery 
               
               
                   
                 channel. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Investments in alternate service channels are made for high value customer base. 
               
               
                   
                 Economies of scale are realized and alternate channels may be deployed to mid-value 
               
               
                   
                 customers. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s ability to understand the costs 
               
               
                   
                 and return on investment in servicing your customer segments? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Costs to service and Return On Investment (ROI) are not applicable. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There is a thorough understanding of costs to serve but ROI is intangible due to 
               
               
                   
                 mutual investment in interaction channels. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The company has a thorough understanding of costs to serve and ROI of each 
               
               
                   
                 interaction channel and how it drives future customer valuation and optimization 
               
               
                   
                 models. 
               
               
                 Data 
                 With regards to your organization&#39;s Business Intelligence data modeling practices, who 
               
               
                 Modeling 
                 has responsibility for creating data usage standards and defining data usage 
               
               
                   
                 terminology? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Business requirements analysts track the architectural knowledge. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Business analyst or systems engineer 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Data Steward and/or Data Arbiter 
               
               
                   
                 How consistent are the Business Intelligence data standards and terminology? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Not consistent 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Fairly consistent 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Very consistent with agreed upon and utilized standards. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree do people question the integrity of the data that feeds business 
               
               
                   
                 intelligence modeling within your organization? (Do people believe the data?) 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Frequently, people place little faith in the quality of the underlying data. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Occasionally, people question certain areas of data management and data integrity. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Not at all, data integrity is managed as an asset by defining the value of the data in 
               
               
                   
                 alignment with Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). 
               
               
                   
                 Is there a Business Intelligence data modeling methodology and who defines it? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No common Business Intelligence modeling methodology exists. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Business Intelligence modeling methodologies exist and are defined and 
               
               
                   
                 maintained within separate business units. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Standardized Business Intelligence modeling methodology exists and is maintained 
               
               
                   
                 by a centralized group fed by systematic business unit input. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree is Business Intelligence data modeling standardized and repeatable in 
               
               
                   
                 your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Disparate Business Intelligence data models may be used in different places in the 
               
               
                   
                 enterprise. There is no complete picture of where, when and how data migrates across 
               
               
                   
                 systems. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The most critical and frequently used processes are standardized for Business 
               
               
                   
                 Intelligence modeling. Frequently used processes (like insertions, alterations, or 
               
               
                   
                 deletions to a table or to the schema) are standardized. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Business Intelligence modeling has reusable design patterns (e.g. naming 
               
               
                   
                 conventions and data types) which become part of a catalog to reuse and reapply 
               
               
                   
                 without having to recreate each time. Frequently used processes are standardized. A 
               
               
                   
                 master model exists and is owned by a data modeler or data architect that maps all of 
               
               
                   
                 the components within the enterprise. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s Business Intelligence data 
               
               
                   
                 modeling tools? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No modeling tool exists, or modeling is done in a simple drawing tool. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Lack of a common modeling tool, multiple modeling tools which are not integrated 
               
               
                   
                 into a common metadata repository. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A single modeling tool that results in a common metadata repository and acts as a 
               
               
                   
                 modeling hub. 
               
               
                   
                 Please describe the capabilities or functionality of your Business Intelligence data 
               
               
                   
                 modeling tools. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Simple graphical representation of the data based on drawing tool&#39;s capabilities. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Tool represents entity relationships but does not represent schema and 
               
               
                   
                 dimensional modeling. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Robust tool functionality contains schema and dimensional modeling and includes 
               
               
                   
                 automatic linkage of foreign keys and automatic integrity checks. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s process of business 
               
               
                   
                 intelligence data modeling change control management? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Changes are performed in an ad-hoc manner and in the absence of any formalized 
               
               
                   
                 change control process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Changes are performed manually and with multiple people involved who work 
               
               
                   
                 independently. This use of multiple resources to perform all steps in the change control 
               
               
                   
                 process without security checkpoints violates best practice security and compliance 
               
               
                   
                 rules. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Changes are performed through a Graphical User Interface (GUI) to the change 
               
               
                   
                 management tool. The tool allows representation of complex data assets in an easily 
               
               
                   
                 understood and maintainable visual format. The tool also enables quick reference, QA 
               
               
                   
                 and template creation to enable a repeatable process. It also enforces the change 
               
               
                   
                 control process and compliance. 
               
               
                   
                 How is change control managed for Business Intelligence data modeling? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No formal change control management process for Business Intelligence modeling. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - People (and paper) management of change control process. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Formal change control process. The modeling tool contains functionality that helps 
               
               
                   
                 manage change and version control. 
               
               
                 Process 
                 Which statement best describes the degree to which organizational processes are 
               
               
                 Definition &amp; 
                 defined? 
               
               
                 Modeling 
                 1 - Processes are tribal within silos and not defined within functional groups. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Processes are defined within functional groups, but not across the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Processes define the end-to-end process across the organization, not just within 
               
               
                   
                 functional groups. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the tools used to document organizational processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Processes are documented with simple drawing capabilities. Documentation 
               
               
                   
                 methods vary widely throughout the organization and are updated as needed. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Processes are documented with simple drawing capabilities and are updated in an 
               
               
                   
                 ad-hoc manner. Documentation methods are consistent within business units. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Processes are iteratively documented across the enterprise. Processes are 
               
               
                   
                 captured and represented visually in advanced modeling tools to facilitate common 
               
               
                   
                 model framework, translation and flexibility between model levels. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent do documented processes delineate ownership roles and 
               
               
                   
                 responsibilities within the processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Processes do not provide clear ownership of activities as well as roles and 
               
               
                   
                 responsibilities. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Processes provide roles and responsibilities definitions at a high level only. 
               
               
                   
                 Different owners for some processes within the same group. Some of the processes 
               
               
                   
                 may have no ownership. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Processes drive definition of roles, responsibilities and ownership to the RACI level 
               
               
                   
                 (Responsible, Accountable, Consult, Inform). 
               
               
                   
                 How consistent is the terminology used in your process documentation? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Different terms are used for the same activity. Use of “internal” terms is prevalent. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Business units use different terms for the same activities or terms. Intermingle 
               
               
                   
                 customer and internal terms. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Standard terminology used throughout the company. Activities use customer 
               
               
                   
                 terminology throughout all processes where customer terms exist. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how process models are created and where they 
               
               
                   
                 are stored/managed? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Existing process models are developed on un-scaleable platforms and exist on 
               
               
                   
                 personal desktops. No central repository for process models. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Disparate locations and owners for process models and simulation packages. 
               
               
                   
                 Moving toward centralization of process repository. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Integrated and shared repository for models. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how the organization keeps track of different 
               
               
                   
                 model updates/versions and how the model is shared among the organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No versioning or sharing of process models. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Manual versioning and sharing of process models. (Example: File names for 
               
               
                   
                 versioning and email to share models). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Full automated versioning built in to the process modeling tool. Interoperability 
               
               
                   
                 between process model and other business systems. 
               
               
                   
                 Which best describe your process modeling analysis and simulation capabilities? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Analysis is focused on units. Simulation is focused on throughput capability only. 
               
               
                   
                 3- Analysis is focused on value added steps. Simulation is functionally focused. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Analysis is focused on units and value added steps in relationship to variations in 
               
               
                   
                 customer needs. Simulation provides ability to conduct change impact analysis across 
               
               
                   
                 organization. 
               
               
                 Value Driven 
                 How would you describe the process metrics used to evaluate enterprise processes? 
               
               
                 Process 
                 1 - Metrics are not tied to processes. Metrics are not aligned into the processes that 
               
               
                 Metrics 
                 generate them. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Process metrics are defined within silos. Each BU has their own metrics and 
               
               
                   
                 definitions with no consistency enterprise-wide. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Process metrics are clearly, fully, and consistently defined across the, organization, 
               
               
                   
                 quantifiable and actionable, and drive process improvement initiatives. 
               
               
                   
                 How is the value of overall process metrics defined when evaluating processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Value is defined by the shareholder expectations. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Value is defined by shareholder expectations, customer expectations are 
               
               
                   
                 secondary. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Value is defined by customer expectations and balanced by shareholder 
               
               
                   
                 expectations. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how customer needs are identified? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer needs and expectations are limited to product definition and design. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Market research is used to identify customer needs and expectations for products 
               
               
                   
                 and services. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer interaction data is used to identify customer needs and expectations and 
               
               
                   
                 value gaps. 
               
               
                   
                 How are non-value added process steps identified? 
               
               
                   
                 1- Customer and agent feedback as well as anecdotal information are used to identify 
               
               
                   
                 and eliminate non-value added process steps within the contact center. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Metric performance drives identification and elimination of non-value added primary 
               
               
                   
                 process steps by individual business units. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Metrics are, expanded to include secondary and tertiary process steps (i.e. steps 
               
               
                   
                 that are recognized as non-value added but currently necessary) which are targeted for 
               
               
                   
                 improvement. 
               
               
                   
                 What components influence process changes on an ongoing basis? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Operational experience drives customer requirements and business needs for 
               
               
                   
                 processes. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Performance metrics are used to evaluate customer requirements and business 
               
               
                   
                 needs for processes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Diagnostic and performance metrics are correlated to evaluate process 
               
               
                   
                 performance against expectation as well as customer requirements and business 
               
               
                   
                 needs for processes. 
               
               
                   
                 How are your processes measured to ensure they are performing against 
               
               
                   
                 expectations? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Anecdotal information is used to gauge effectiveness of process improvements. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Performance after the change is reflected in current metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Metric definitions are validated against impact of changes and refined, if necessary. 
               
               
                   
                 New metrics may replace existing metrics if expected impact is achieved. 
               
               
                 Process 
                 How is customer interaction data collected for analysis of business processes? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - Data is collected regarding the customer service transaction via quality monitoring 
               
               
                   
                 and operational metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Data is collected regarding specific customer service experiences after the 
               
               
                   
                 transaction has occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Transaction data is collected and integrated with enterprise data and operational 
               
               
                   
                 metrics to evaluate the broad customer experience. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization determine which contact center processes should be 
               
               
                   
                 targeted for improvement? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Operational experience, expertise and anecdotal information is used to make 
               
               
                   
                 process changes. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Agent and company performance metrics are used to evaluate contact center 
               
               
                   
                 processes. Root cause analysis is not performed. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Diagnostic metrics are used to point to ineffective contact center and upstream 
               
               
                   
                 processes to determine root cause of process issues within the enterprise. 
               
               
                   
                 How are process changes communicated throughout the organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Functional process owners are informally defined and have limited accountability for 
               
               
                   
                 communicating process changes. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Functional process owners have accountability and communicate with other owners 
               
               
                   
                 to drive change within desired timeframes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A quick, closed loop feedback process is in place to drive process changes and 
               
               
                   
                 communicate changes to the organization and ensure a short cause and effect cycle. 
               
               
                   
                 What are the components used to determine prioritization of potential process 
               
               
                   
                 changes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Urgency and magnitude of inefficiency drive potential process changes with no 
               
               
                   
                 formal prioritization process utilized. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Understanding of costs associated with process issues drives prioritization of 
               
               
                   
                 potential process changes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Complexity and strategic value drive prioritization of potential process changes. 
               
               
                   
                 What inputs are used for determining the contact center service needs and 
               
               
                   
                 expectations of customers? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer needs and expectations are considered but input is limited to product 
               
               
                   
                 definition and design. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Market research is used to identify customer needs and expectations for products 
               
               
                   
                 and services across the entire lifecycle. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer interaction data is used to identify and refine customer needs and 
               
               
                   
                 expectations as well as value gaps. 
               
               
                   
                 How are process changes coordinated internally and externally to the contact center 
               
               
                   
                 environment? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Operational changes are dictated at a corporate level for implementation within the 
               
               
                   
                 contact center by center management. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Operational changes to processes are implemented within the contact center by 
               
               
                   
                 center management. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Changes to processes are implemented in a coordinated effort to ensure alignment 
               
               
                   
                 of upstream and downstream impacts. 
               
               
                 Leading 
                 Which statement best describes your organization&#39;s view of leading practices? 
               
               
                 Practice 
                 1 - Leading practices are recognized as potential tools but are rarely understood, 
               
               
                 Management 
                 evaluated or seen as applicable for their environment. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Organization recognizes value of external leading practice identification as potential 
               
               
                   
                 solutions for larger problems. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Progressive organization demonstrating methodical rapid adoption of capabilities 
               
               
                   
                 that will allow them to differentiate their offering and a willingness to invest in the same. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent is a leading practice identification culture instilled in your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Consultants or external influences provide best practice methodology to the 
               
               
                   
                 organization. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Leadership roles are trained in application of leading practices. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Leading practice culture is instilled at all levels within the organization. Application 
               
               
                   
                 of leading practices is the responsibility of all individuals. 
               
               
                   
                 How are leading practices identified in your company? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Leading practices are found by accident and rarely or infrequently applied. 
               
               
                   
                 Benchmarking is not used. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Leading practice is sought after and applied for complex solutions and to 
               
               
                   
                 benchmark current performance. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Leading practice identification and application is a standard process for all types of 
               
               
                   
                 problems, the practice becomes the benchmark. 
               
               
                   
                 How are internal best practices developed and refined in your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Little or no feedback is sought from agent and operational management levels on 
               
               
                   
                 customer interaction issues. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer interaction issues are categorized to determine root causes. Agent and 
               
               
                   
                 operations management routinely meet to define leading practice within the center. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Operations team (agents and management) collaborates with upstream 
               
               
                   
                 organizations to define and, confirm leading practices. Process changes are evaluated 
               
               
                   
                 for impact and alignment throughout the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 How are your company&#39;s leading practices evaluated? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No evaluation of leading practices that may have been applied due to infrequency 
               
               
                   
                 of application. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Individual solutions are evaluated for effectiveness but are not compared to leading 
               
               
                   
                 practice results. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Critical evaluation and fine tuning are conducted to exceed the documented 
               
               
                   
                 performance of the leading practice. 
               
               
                 Product 
                 What types of information are used to define product requirements? 
               
               
                 Development 
                 1 - Market research and competitive analysis is used to define product requirements. 
               
               
                 Lifecycle 
                 3 - Market segmentation and ad-hoc surveys are inputs for product development. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer interaction data is an integral part of the input into product development. 
               
               
                   
                 Marketing regularly uses call center data and agent/customer feedback into product 
               
               
                   
                 design. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are future product requirements influenced by customer feedback? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer feedback is captured after the transaction but there is little or no design 
               
               
                   
                 to capture future product requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Future product requirements are driven by customer feedback which is captured 
               
               
                   
                 after the transaction has occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer interaction processes are designed and refined to capture future product 
               
               
                   
                 requirements during the transaction. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your company&#39;s product testing efforts? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Existing customer base is sporadically utilized to provide input on product features 
               
               
                   
                 and functionality. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - External focus groups are utilized prior to product launches. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Internal and external focus groups driven by customer segmentation are utilized to 
               
               
                   
                 identify product feature and functionality requirements throughout a product lifecycle. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent is customer interaction data used to make product decisions? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer interaction data is not used in product decisioning. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer interaction data is used to make decisions at the beginning of the product 
               
               
                   
                 development cycle. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Feedback and customer interaction data are used to make investment decisions at 
               
               
                   
                 structured gate reviews during the product development cycle. 
               
               
                 Pricing 
                 What kind of cost analysis is performed when determining product and service pricing? 
               
               
                 Optimization 
                 1 - Minimal understanding of costs involved and usually focused on development costs 
               
               
                   
                 with little or no depth on operating costs. Limited access to or inconsistent cost data to 
               
               
                   
                 make pricing trade-off decisions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Product capability trade-offs and pricing strategy driven by detailed understanding 
               
               
                   
                 of development and operating costs through Traditional Cost Accounting. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Cohesive pricing strategy refinement that uses Activity Based Costing to fully 
               
               
                   
                 understand cost drivers of product capabilities and margin contribution components. 
               
               
                   
                 What role does supply and demand play in your pricing strategy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Supply and demand are small contributors to overall pricing strategy with primary 
               
               
                   
                 focus on demand forecasting for product capabilities. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Supply and demand forecasting have a rudimentary impact on pricing strategy 
               
               
                   
                 primarily by contributing to initial product capability and discounting decisions. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Supply and demand forecasting are integral contributors to price elasticity analyses 
               
               
                   
                 and used to drive capability and pricing strategy decisions throughout the product 
               
               
                   
                 lifecycle. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the use of price elasticity analysis in your pricing 
               
               
                   
                 strategy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Price elasticity is not a driving factor in pricing strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Price elasticity analysis has a small influence on the overall pricing strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Price elasticity analysis has a strong influence on the overall pricing strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the research sources used to define a pricing strategy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Ad-hoc market feedback and basic industry research is used to determine pricing 
               
               
                   
                 strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Feedback gathered from focus groups, third party validation, and market studies 
               
               
                   
                 contribute to a structured pricing strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Focus group, third party and market studies, combined with a systematic collection 
               
               
                   
                 of internal/external customer interaction data and detailed competitor product pricing all 
               
               
                   
                 contribute to the pricing strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the link between customer segmentation and pricing 
               
               
                   
                 strategy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Pricing strategy is not linked to customer segmentation. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Pricing strategy is driven by expectations of product performance within market 
               
               
                   
                 segments, not individual customer segments. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Pricing strategy is aligned and constantly re-evaluated against business strategy 
               
               
                   
                 goals within individual customer segments. 
               
               
                 Product Mix 
                 Which statement best describes the relationship between product profitability and 
               
               
                 Optimization 
                 product mix? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Basic understanding of individual product profitability but not optimal product mix. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Basic understanding of individual product profitability and optimal product mix. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Complete understanding of individual product profitability with formalized checks 
               
               
                   
                 and balances to continually optimize product mix for maximum profitability. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your overall agility of being able to adapt optimal product 
               
               
                   
                 mixes to ever-changing market conditions? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Infrastructure, resource investments, and current product development lifecycles 
               
               
                   
                 inhibit changing product mix. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Infrastructure, resource investments, and product development lifecycles can be 
               
               
                   
                 leveraged to optimally accommodate only slow changes in market conditions. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Infrastructure, resource investments, and product development lifecycles are, built 
               
               
                   
                 with flexibility in mind to efficiently accommodate rapidly changing market, conditions. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent is market intelligence used in determining your product mix? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Market intelligence is not used or only assessed on an infrequent basis. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Market intelligence is used to provide demand insight into various product 
               
               
                   
                 segments. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Market intelligence is used to provide and forecast detailed present and future 
               
               
                   
                 product demands, and is used to determine optimization of product mix. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your organization&#39;s understanding of the competitive, physical, 
               
               
                   
                 and regulatory environments surrounding your product mix? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Competitive, physical, and regulatory environment constraints are minimally 
               
               
                   
                 understood. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Competitive, physical, and regulatory environment constraints are understood 
               
               
                   
                 without a quantified impact analysis. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Competitive, physical, and regulatory environment constraints are understood and 
               
               
                   
                 have detailed impact analyses performed on all complexities. Mitigation plans are 
               
               
                   
                 usually considered in product mix decisions. 
               
               
                 Marketing 
                 Which statement best describes the focus of your product messaging? 
               
               
                 Definition 
                 1 - Product messaging is focused on basic product features (ex: what it does and how 
               
               
                 Development &amp; 
                 it does it). 
               
               
                 Deployment 
                 3 - Product messaging is focused on basic product features, benefits, and 
               
               
                   
                 specifications. Value proposition to customer is usually slightly differentiated from 
               
               
                   
                 competition. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Product messaging is focused on the differentiated or superior value a customer 
               
               
                   
                 receives relative to competing products or services. 
               
               
                   
                 How is customer interaction data incorporated into your marketing messaging? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer interaction data is not used to determine marketing messaging. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer interaction data is minimally or anecdotally used to determine the 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate marketing messaging. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer interaction data is analyzed and highly leveraged to determine 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate marketing messaging. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes how information on new offerings is internally 
               
               
                   
                 disseminated? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Marketing provides new offering materials to Sales to aid in delivering message to 
               
               
                   
                 market. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Marketing prepares and trains sales organization to deliver consistent and accurate 
               
               
                   
                 messages to markets focused on new offerings. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - All customer-facing internal teams participate in Marketing led training to deliver 
               
               
                   
                 consistent and accurate awareness of new, evolving and discontinued products and 
               
               
                   
                 services. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the systems that support the communication of 
               
               
                   
                 customer feedback to internal groups? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Manual (i.e. email) or minimal system provides customer feedback from customer- 
               
               
                   
                 facing groups. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer interface technology gathers and centralizes customer feedback from 
               
               
                   
                 customer-facing groups. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer interface technology gathers and centralizes customer feedback, and 
               
               
                   
                 enables analysis in order to make customer-centric decisions. 
               
               
                   
                 Please describe the extent to which your culture is customer-centric and how marketing 
               
               
                   
                 messaging gets updated to reflect this. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer-centric culture is not prevalent across the organization. Messaging rarely 
               
               
                   
                 gets updated as product changes occur. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer focused culture provides standard processes among internal groups to 
               
               
                   
                 enable Marketing to update messaging when larger needs are identified. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer focus culture provides incentive to respond quickly, refine, retool and 
               
               
                   
                 redeploy product enhancements and respective messaging. 
               
               
                 Self 
                 How are business problems identified in your organization? 
               
               
                 Learning 
                 1 - Reactive and undefined process for identifying business problems. 
               
               
                 Organization 
                 3 - Informal collaborative process for identifying business problems. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Formalized collaborative process for proactively identifying business problems. 
               
               
                   
                 How are solutions to business problems proposed in your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Reactive and undefined process for proposing solutions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Informal collaborative process for proposing solutions typically emanating from 
               
               
                   
                 upper management. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Formalized collaborative process for proactively proposing solutions at all levels of 
               
               
                   
                 the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are lessons learned applied to your customer service channels? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Lessons learned are not formally captured and usually not used to improve 
               
               
                   
                 customer service channels. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Lessons learned are usually captured and used to improve customer service 
               
               
                   
                 channels. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Lessons learned are used to improve customer service channels, business 
               
               
                   
                 processes, training materials, and are implemented quickly through a formalized 
               
               
                   
                 process. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your organization&#39;s leadership objectives for learning 
               
               
                   
                 initiatives? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Command-and-control leadership objectives in which learning is in opposition with 
               
               
                   
                 leadership style. Knowledge is passed down manually from superiors. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Leadership objectives are not formally aligned with or focused on continuous 
               
               
                   
                 learning opportunities for individuals or teams. Most applicable organizational 
               
               
                   
                 knowledge is available but little directional guidance is provided. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Leadership objectives encourage individual and team collaboration in ongoing 
               
               
                   
                 learning initiatives. Knowledge is readily available, fully aligned with training initiatives, 
               
               
                   
                 and is disseminated to all employees across the enterprise. 
               
               
                   
                 How is organizational knowledge typically shared in your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Knowledge is usually shared through common network drives, emails, or 
               
               
                   
                 notifications. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Knowledge is typically shared through separate non-integrated knowledge systems 
               
               
                   
                 within individual business units. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Knowledge is usually shared through an enterprise-wide knowledge management 
               
               
                   
                 system and used to identify organization intelligence and best practices. 
               
               
                 Knowledge 
                 Which of the following best describes your knowledge repository? 
               
               
                 Repository 
                 1 - Many basic knowledge repositories (i.e. LAN folders) exist within functional groups. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Repository toolsets (i.e. MS Sharepoint) are used to catalog and maintain 
               
               
                   
                 knowledge within separate business unit groups. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Centralized knowledge repository provides enterprise-wide knowledge 
               
               
                   
                 management. 
               
               
                   
                 How is content managed within your knowledge repository? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Cataloguing and content aging is managed infrequently or not at all. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Cataloguing &amp; content aging is managed manually by content owners. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Higher integrity cataloguing &amp; content aging has integrated workflows for approval 
               
               
                   
                 and review processes, and automated reduction of duplicated information. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the content in your knowledge repository? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Inconsistent authoring and definitions with no formal document review or update 
               
               
                   
                 process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Intelligent problem resolution process modeling into existing knowledge content. 
               
               
                   
                 Formal document review of new content and updates. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Content creation, capture, and approval workflows for new issues, products, and 
               
               
                   
                 areas of focus are formally defined and rapidly integrated into knowledge database. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your knowledge repository&#39;s accessibility? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No oversight or ownership of the effectiveness, usefulness, or business strategy 
               
               
                   
                 alignment of knowledge content. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Regular reviews and some self-policing of knowledge content and solution 
               
               
                   
                 management. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Systematic approach to ensure knowledge management content supports 
               
               
                   
                 organizational strategy. Proactive search for exceptional operating performance that 
               
               
                   
                 signals best practice activity systems. 
               
               
                   
                 How are content searches performed within your knowledge repository? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Indexed searchable database or search engine. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Indexed searchable database or search engine that includes qualification/solutions 
               
               
                   
                 to problem sets and known issues. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Indexed and context-specific database or search engine that includes 
               
               
                   
                 qualification/solutions to problem sets and known issues. 
               
               
                   
                 Which best describes the knowledge repository&#39;s rating and sorting algorithm capability 
               
               
                   
                 to diagnose potential solutions to issues or problems? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Segmentation or diagnosis by specific content domains. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Case-based reasoning and decision trees are used. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Statistical correlation analysis of problem and solution used to refine case-based 
               
               
                   
                 reasoning and decision trees. 
               
               
                 Leading 
                 To what extent are your company&#39;s Methods &amp; Procedures documentation centralized? 
               
               
                 M&amp;P 
                 1 - Repositories are segmented and restricted to individual teams.i 
               
               
                 Definition &amp; 
                 3 - Some knowledge content is captured into centralized systems of record but not 
               
               
                 Deployment 
                 equally available to teams across enterprise. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Information is captured and is quickly and universally available in centralized 
               
               
                   
                 systems of record. 
               
               
                   
                 What methods of change control exist for Methods &amp; Procedures? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - System support for methods and procedures (M&amp;Ps) is primarily confined to folder 
               
               
                   
                 structure on LAN with little or no change control. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Manual methods for change control are utilized. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Systems support M&amp;P change control processes. 
               
               
                   
                 How are internal methods and procedures assessed and revised? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Occasional assessment and revision of internal methods, and procedures when 
               
               
                   
                 major business changes occur, not necessarily when critically needed. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Assessment and revision of internal methods and procedures are performed when 
               
               
                   
                 critically needed. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Assessment and revision of internal methods and procedures are performed in a 
               
               
                   
                 systematic, ongoing fashion. 
               
               
                   
                 What consideration if any, do best practices receive when changing internal methods 
               
               
                   
                 and procedures? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Best practices are usually not considered, researched, or analyzed. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Best practices are considered with some research &amp; analysis of existing leading 
               
               
                   
                 practices. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Pro-active outreach to research, analyze, and apply other best practice 
               
               
                   
                 management techniques to improve current performance and benchmarks. 
               
               
                   
                 Who in your organization has responsibility for creating or changing methods, 
               
               
                   
                 procedures, and knowledge content? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Little or no consistency with respect to who creates or changes methods, 
               
               
                   
                 procedures, and knowledge content. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Middle and upper management usually have most authority to create or change 
               
               
                   
                 methods, procedures, and knowledge content. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Middle and upper management, individual contributors, and team leads participate 
               
               
                   
                 in continually improving methods and procedures through knowledge content revision 
               
               
                   
                 and creation. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 9 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Exemplary organization of questions and exemplars associated with attributes and capabilities of a 
               
               
                 talent management domain 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Profile 
                 How would you describe the job descriptions at your organization? 
               
               
                 Development 
                 1 - Vague, high-level job descriptions at the department level. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Skill-based job descriptions (knowledge, abilities, tasks and experiences required). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Competency-based job descriptions (responsibilities, company fit, and employee 
               
               
                   
                 accountability) tied to performance metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 Describe your organization&#39;s competency evaluation methodology for job descriptions 
               
               
                   
                 (the process of grouping similar knowledge, skills, and abilities under headings, or 
               
               
                   
                 “competencies”)? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No competency evaluation methodology is in place. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Competency evaluation methodology is an informal process. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Competency evaluation methodology is an formal process. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your organization&#39;s job profiles? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Job profiles are not competency-based and cultural fit profiles do not exist. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Job profiles are competency-based and include cultural fit profiles. These profiles 
               
               
                   
                 are loosely tied to existing staff performance and changing customer care 
               
               
                   
                 requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Job profiles are competency-based and include cultural fit profiles. These profiles 
               
               
                   
                 are consistently updated based on the performance of existing staff in conjunction with 
               
               
                   
                 changing customer care requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 How often does your organization update it&#39;s job profiles? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Rarely if ever. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Infrequently. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Frequently. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization utilize job profiles? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Profile development seeks only to fill existing job roles within functional silos. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Profile development is moderately aligned to the organization&#39;s strategic business 
               
               
                   
                 goals, culture, and customer needs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Personal Profile Analyses (PPAs) are used frequently for selection, retention, 
               
               
                   
                 cultural fit, and leadership effectiveness. Customer Segmentation needs are the 
               
               
                   
                 primary drivers for profile development. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are job profiles aligned to enterprise objectives? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - De-centralized departmental job descriptions and profiles are created, developed, 
               
               
                   
                 and maintained by individual business units. The Business unit operates independent 
               
               
                   
                 of organizational goals and strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Departmental job descriptions and profiles are centrally created and developed, but 
               
               
                   
                 maintained by individual business units. It is up to the business unit to check for 
               
               
                   
                 organizational alignment. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Job profiles are centralized thorough an inter-departmental needs assessment for 
               
               
                   
                 cross-functional job descriptions. 
               
               
                 Recruiting 
                 How would describe your organization&#39;s talent acquisition strategy or process? 
               
               
                 Channel 
                 1 - Human Resources monitors popular career websites, company website, and 
               
               
                 Management 
                 traditional media for applicable resumes/profiles based on internal business needs and 
               
               
                   
                 objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Human Resources and human capital specialists within functional BUs design 
               
               
                   
                 talent acquisition strategy that aligns to customer needs and business objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The business unit management team, with Human Resources as a partner, designs 
               
               
                   
                 talent acquisition strategy and executes based on organizational design, business 
               
               
                   
                 goals, and customer alignment. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization select optimal recruitment channels (e.g. company 
               
               
                   
                 website, job search engines, career fairs, advertisements)? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Recruitment channels are selected based solely on the lowest cost. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Recruitment channels are formally defined and utilized based on cost and historical 
               
               
                   
                 fill rate data. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Current and potential recruitment channels are evaluated continuously based on 
               
               
                   
                 quantitative and qualitative historical fill rate data. 
               
               
                   
                 What cost factors (channel selection, candidate type, effort, level of spend, outreach, 
               
               
                   
                 insource or outsource, and technology) are considered during the recruiting channel 
               
               
                   
                 management process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Cost factors are not considered or measured against Return on Investment(ROI), 
               
               
                   
                 recruiting quality, or effectiveness. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some cost factors are informally considered and loosely measured against ROI, 
               
               
                   
                 recruiting quality, and effectiveness. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Each potential cost factor is carefully evaluated, measured, and refined against 
               
               
                   
                 ROI, recruiting quality, and effectiveness. 
               
               
                 Candidate 
                 How are your organization&#39;s job descriptions and profiles maintained? 
               
               
                 Pipeline 
                 1 - Job descriptions and profiles database exists but is not updated regularly. 
               
               
                 Management 
                 3 - Job descriptions and profiles database is maintained for all company functions and 
               
               
                   
                 is updated as new positions are created. Job postings are managed from the database 
               
               
                   
                 and updated as positions open and close. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Resumes/job applications are maintained within the job posting database with 
               
               
                   
                 automatic matching in place to job descriptions and profiles. 
               
               
                   
                 Describe your staffing management process. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Paper-based staffing and resume-based records exist that become obsolete over 
               
               
                   
                 time and must be pulled up and picked through manually. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Decentralized mixture of paper-based and web-based staffing management 
               
               
                   
                 solutions. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Centralized, up-to-date, web-based staffing management solutions. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization forecast its talent lifecycle? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Roles are filled just-in-time (JIT) based on attrition only, often resulting in temporary 
               
               
                   
                 labor resource shortages. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Position/Role prospective candidate pools are created based on attrition frequency. 
               
               
                   
                 Forecasts are used infrequently. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The organization utilizes customized talent lifecycle management initiatives for 
               
               
                   
                 professionals and hourly employees. Forecasts are actively managed based on 
               
               
                   
                 business and market factors (e.g. attrition rate, acquisition rate, acquisition cost). 
               
               
                 Interviewing 
                 Describe the qualification and selection criteria your organization uses to screen 
               
               
                 and Selection 
                 applicants. 
               
               
                 Process 
                 1 - Basic needs identification vs. existing resource assessment. Past experience is the 
               
               
                   
                 only consideration for candidate selection. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Semi-formal qualification process using skills-based candidate identification. 
               
               
                   
                 Screening is primarily used to assess compatibility with coworkers, interpersonal skills, 
               
               
                   
                 and fit with the organization&#39;s culture. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Formal qualification process using skills-based candidate identification and 
               
               
                   
                 competency-based candidate identification. Screening is primarily used to assess 
               
               
                   
                 compatibility with coworkers, interpersonal skills, and fit with the organization&#39;s culture. 
               
               
                   
                 Describe your organization&#39;s interviewing methods. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No clearly defined interviewing process is utilized. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Behavior-based interview questions (questions that center around past experiences 
               
               
                   
                 and how the interviewee acted in those situations - e.g. “Provide an example of a goal 
               
               
                   
                 you set in your last position and describe how you went about achieving that goal”). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A combination of Behavior based and Line Oriented or “Situation-based” interview 
               
               
                   
                 questions: The Line Oriented interview incorporates a simulated environment reflecting 
               
               
                   
                 the work environment the candidate is interviewing for. For example, the interviewee 
               
               
                   
                 may be asked to put on a headset and answer mock customer questions from the 
               
               
                   
                 interviewer. This methodology is used to provide insight as to how the candidate may 
               
               
                   
                 perform on the job. 
               
               
                   
                 How is the performance of a new hire measured? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is no existing methodology to evaluate new hire performance. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The organization uses an informal methodology to evaluate new hire performance. 
               
               
                   
                 For example, the new hire&#39;s manager provides anecdotal feedback concerning the 
               
               
                   
                 performance of the new employee. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The organization uses a clearly defined formal methodology to evaluate new hire 
               
               
                   
                 performance. For example, there are metrics directly tied to the new hire&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 performance that are consistently analyzed by management and communicated to the 
               
               
                   
                 new hire. 
               
               
                   
                 What methodology does your organization utilize to hold hiring managers and recruiters 
               
               
                   
                 accountable for the talent acquisition process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Hiring managers and recruiters are not held accountable by any formal 
               
               
                   
                 measurement standard for the talent acquisition process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Hiring manager&#39;s and recruiter&#39;s accountability is qualitatively measured. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Hiring manager&#39;s and recruiter&#39;s accountability is qualitatively and quantitatively 
               
               
                   
                 measured (i.e. there are metrics in place to measure accountability). 
               
               
                 Customer 
                 To what extent does your organization assign higher performing agents/centers to high 
               
               
                 Alignment 
                 value customers? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No customer value categorization exists (e.g. your organization does not segment 
               
               
                   
                 your customers by high, medium, or low value) 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer segmentation exists but differing agent performance does not align to 
               
               
                   
                 them. (e.g. Your organization does not assign higher performing agents to high value 
               
               
                   
                 customers) 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Higher performing agents are assigned to high value customers. 
               
               
                 Customer 
                 To what extent is ‘customer care’ communicated internally as part of your organization&#39;s 
               
               
                 Care Culture 
                 brand? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is, no internal communication about brand as it relates to customer care. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Periodic group activities are conducted to promote brand messaging strategy and 
               
               
                   
                 reinforce customer-centric culture branding. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Executive management regularly affirms brand values and customer-centric 
               
               
                   
                 messaging strategy. All levels of management reinforce brand during daily activities 
               
               
                   
                 and agents are expected to fulfill brand image. 
               
               
                 Career 
                 Which of the following best describes how job positions are created or modified in your 
               
               
                 Pathing 
                 organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Job position creation is typically static and processes to make changes are often 
               
               
                   
                 inconsistent or inefficient. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Job position creation and refinement processes are defined but infrequently 
               
               
                   
                 assessed to ensure that positions match the current business needs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Job position creation and refinement processes are well defined and regularly 
               
               
                   
                 assessed to ensure that positions match the current business needs. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe the level of career path mobility in your company? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Functional department career bubble (little or no mobility). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Cross-functional career pathing occurs when personal connections are present. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Cross-functional career pathing is part of talent management and goals. 
               
               
                   
                 Opportunities across the business are communicated regularly. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are career paths defined in your company? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Career path opportunities are unclear and may often not exist. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Career paths are defined but they are not clearly communicated throughout the 
               
               
                   
                 organization. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Career paths are clearly defined and communicated throughout the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your company&#39;s ability to hire internally? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The organization mainly practices outside hiring. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The organization utilizes an informal process to identify potential internal 
               
               
                   
                 candidates before looking externally. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The organization utilizes a formal process to identify potential internal candidates 
               
               
                   
                 before seeking external candidates. 
               
               
                 Organizational 
                 To what extent are employee roles and responsibilities (R&amp;Rs) defined? 
               
               
                 Design &amp; 
                 1 - (R&amp;Rs) are unclear and may often not exist. 
               
               
                 Development 
                 3 - (R&amp;Rs) are defined but they are not clearly communicated throughout the 
               
               
                   
                 organization. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - (R&amp;Rs) are clearly defined and communicated throughout the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are communications processes defined in your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Communications processes amongst organizational levels is minimally defined. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Communications processes amongst organizational levels is defined based on the 
               
               
                   
                 type and urgency of messages. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Communications processes amongst organizational levels is clearly defined and 
               
               
                   
                 there are multiple communication options that provide easy and rapid cascading of 
               
               
                   
                 information and feedback. 
               
               
                 Curriculum 
                 How would you describe your company&#39;s training content? 
               
               
                 Development 
                 1 - The training content covers only a description of the position&#39;s tasks. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The training content covers a description of the position&#39;s tasks, and usually 
               
               
                   
                 incorporates knowledge, skills, and abilities necessary for the job (Ex. General 
               
               
                   
                 Customer Service training for a call center agent). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The training content covers a description of the position&#39;s tasks, and consistently 
               
               
                   
                 incorporates knowledge, skills, and abilities necessary for the job (Ex. General 
               
               
                   
                 Customer Service training for a call center agent). 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your training content include training performance expectations? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Performance expectations do not exist in the training content. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Performance expectations exist but are not clearly defined in the training content. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Performance expectations are clearly defined in the training content. 
               
               
                 Onboarding 
                 How quickly are New Hires provided with IT systems access? 
               
               
                 Process 
                 1 - New Hires are frequently not granted (computer) systems access on their first day. 
               
               
                   
                 Often times, it may take up to a week or longer to grant the new employee full facilities 
               
               
                   
                 and systems access. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - New Hires are frequently granted (computer) systems access on their first day. If 
               
               
                   
                 the New Hire is not granted full access on their first day, they typically gain full access 
               
               
                   
                 within a few days. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - New Hires are consistently granted (computer) systems access on their first day. 
               
               
                   
                 How quickly are New Hires provided with facilities and systems access? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - New Hires are frequently not granted facilities access on their first day. Often 
               
               
                   
                 times, it may take up to a week or longer to grant the new employee full facilities 
               
               
                   
                 access. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - New Hires are frequently granted facilities access on their first day. If the New Hire 
               
               
                   
                 is not granted full access on their first day, they typically gain full access within a few 
               
               
                   
                 days. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - New Hires are consistently granted facilities access on their first day. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your organization differentiate it&#39;s onboarding processes between 
               
               
                   
                 different positions? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Onboarding processes do not have position-specific differentiations (all positions 
               
               
                   
                 have the same onboarding process). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Onboarding processes have some position-specific differentiations. (some positions 
               
               
                   
                 have a specific onboarding process specific to that role). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Orboarding processes primarily have position-specific differentiations. (Virtually all, 
               
               
                   
                 if not all positions have a specific onboarding process specific to that role). 
               
               
                   
                 Describe new hire orientation during your organization&#39;s onboarding process. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No formal orientation exists. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - An informal orientation exists and focuses on establishing critical knowledge, skills, 
               
               
                   
                 and abilities. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A formal, comprehensive orientation exists and focuses on establishing critical 
               
               
                   
                 knowledge, skills, and abilities as well as promotion of organization culture. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your organization utilize mentors during the onboarding process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Mentor program is minimal or not established. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Mentor program is informal. (There is a process in place to obtain a mentor but it is 
               
               
                   
                 not necessarily encouraged for new hires). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Structured mentor program is available to employees and encouraged. 
               
               
                 Training 
                 Describe the training delivery channels used in your company. 
               
               
                 Deployment 
                 1 - Predominately classroom with some computer-based training. On-the-job training is 
               
               
                   
                 conducted but typically there is no formal structure around this stage of training. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - A balance of classroom and computer-based training is supplemented with formal, 
               
               
                   
                 on-the-job training. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Blended learning approaches (classroom, online/web based, one-on-one coaching, 
               
               
                   
                 self-study, job shadowing, lab and virtual class) is supplemented with formal on-the-job 
               
               
                   
                 training. 
               
               
                   
                 Describe the timing and frequency of new product/service training. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Product/service training is typically deployed during the product/offering&#39;s launch. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Product/service training is frequently, but not always deployed before the 
               
               
                   
                 product/offering&#39;s launch such that the contact center is prepared to field issues 
               
               
                   
                 pertaining to the new product/offering on the first day it is available to customers. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Product/service training is consistently deployed before the product/offering&#39;s launch 
               
               
                   
                 such that the contact center is prepared to field issues pertaining to the new 
               
               
                   
                 product/offering on the first day it is available to customers. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s training methodology? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Role-specific, one-dimensional training only (ex. Sales). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Skill and capability-specific training is multi-dimensional (ex. Sales, Service). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Skill and capability-specific training is balanced and multi-dimensional (ex. Sales, 
               
               
                   
                 Service, Technical Acumen, Writing). 
               
               
                 Training 
                 What kind of post-training performance evaluations are conducted in your organization? 
               
               
                 Metric 
                 1 - Immediate post-training tests are given that focus on recall and rote memorization 
               
               
                 Management 
                 versus skill acquisition and application. Curriculum objectives are simply reinforced. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Multiple post-training mediums (e.g. test, survey) are given to assess the 
               
               
                   
                 effectiveness of skill acquisition and application. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Multiple post-training mediums as well as on the job performance are analyzed in 
               
               
                   
                 order to evaluate training effectiveness. This is typically done via business scorecard 
               
               
                   
                 metrics. Metrics performance drives future training opportunities. 
               
               
                   
                 Describe how training effectiveness is evaluated. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Training effectiveness is not formally measured against curriculum objectives and 
               
               
                   
                 training deployment methods. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Training effectiveness is occasionally evaluated against curriculum objectives and 
               
               
                   
                 training deployment methods. These evaluations are used to continually improve the 
               
               
                   
                 training program. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Training effectiveness is continually evaluated against curriculum objectives and 
               
               
                   
                 training deployment methods. These evaluations are used to continually improve the 
               
               
                   
                 training program. 
               
               
                 Incentive 
                 Which of the following best describes the consistency of your organization&#39;s base 
               
               
                 Structure 
                 salary? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Base salary is consistent across similar roles. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Base salaries are consistent relative to tenure with transparent ranges based on 
               
               
                   
                 organizational role. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Competitive base pay is linked to value creation with transparent ranges based on 
               
               
                   
                 organizational roles. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s incentive program? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Incentive programs exist but employees do not understand how their incentives are 
               
               
                   
                 calculated. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - A structured incentive program exists but it does not include pay for performance 
               
               
                   
                 evaluations. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Incentive programs include a pay for performance evaluation method that yields the 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate rewards. 
               
               
                   
                 What are incentive program payouts tied to? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The company&#39;s incentive program payout is ill defined and inconsistent. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Payouts include company-wide performance against established metrics. Individual 
               
               
                   
                 compensation based components may exist. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Payouts include company-wide performance against established metrics as well as 
               
               
                   
                 individual compensation based components. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how your company assesses the effectiveness of 
               
               
                   
                 your company&#39;s reward program? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Reward programs have no formal feedback processes, reviews, or benchmarking 
               
               
                   
                 metrics in place. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Reward programs are infrequently reviewed and benchmarked against critical 
               
               
                   
                 program metrics. These metrics may include program activity, program participation, 
               
               
                   
                 budget tracking, hierarchical approval, manager involvement, and award redemption at 
               
               
                   
                 the organizational level. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Reward programs include scheduled formal reviews at the organization and team 
               
               
                   
                 levels using established metrics to ensure appropriateness, fairness and accuracy. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree do target recipients have input into the design of the company&#39;s reward 
               
               
                   
                 programs? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Target recipients for rewards have no input into program design. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Target recipients for rewards have opportunities to provide feedback to designers of 
               
               
                   
                 reward programs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Target recipients for rewards are involved in the development, rollout, refinement 
               
               
                   
                 and evaluation of reward programs. 
               
               
                 Benefits 
                 Does your organization have a benefits mission statement? 
               
               
                 Structure 
                 1 - There is no formal mission statement. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Informal benefits intentions and goals are defined. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Formal benefits mission statement is made available to all employees. 
               
               
                   
                 How flexible is your company&#39;s benefits plan with respect to individual needs? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Not flexible to employee needs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Benefits plans include some flexibility regarding employee needs such as tuition 
               
               
                   
                 reimbursement and flex spending. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Flexible plans are tailored to audience identification and specific needs. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how your company communicates the benefits 
               
               
                   
                 plan? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Informal benefits information provided upon hire. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Plans communicated and explained during new hire orientation and re-enrollment. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Benefits plans are regularly communicated throughout the year. 
               
               
                   
                 How are your company&#39;s benefits packages structured? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Single tier - one choice for medical, dental, and vision. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Single tier structure with several option for dental and vision plans. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Multi-tiered, multi-option packages aligned to organization role level and based on 
               
               
                   
                 Return on Investment (ROI). 
               
               
                   
                 How much does your company contribute towards the costs for medical, dental, vision, 
               
               
                   
                 and life insurance? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Employee pays all. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Employee and Company both pay a portion. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The company pays all. 
               
               
                   
                 How many weeks of paid vacation does your company provide? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - 1-2 weeks of paid vacation. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - 2-3 weeks of paid vacation. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - 3 weeks+ of paid vacation. 
               
               
                   
                 What miscellaneous benefits does your company provide to employees? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The company does not provide any miscellaneous benefits. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There are some miscellaneous benefits. Example - free bus passes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The Company provides a host of perks. Examples - paid sabbaticals, child care 
               
               
                   
                 facilities. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the access you have to benefits information? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - A database application houses employee benefits information. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - A web portal with a user-friendly interface and unrestricted access houses benefits 
               
               
                   
                 information. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A web portal with a user-friendly interface and unrestricted access houses benefits 
               
               
                   
                 information. Employees also have the ability to review and update their benefits through 
               
               
                   
                 this portal. 
               
               
                   
                 Describe the availability of support you have when inquiring about benefits information. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - You must send an email to the Human Resources department. 
               
               
                   
                 2 - You have a number to call but only during standard business hours. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - You have a number to call with 24 hour support. 
               
               
                 Non-Monetary 
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s recognition program features? 
               
               
                 Recognition 
                 1 - There is no formal recognition program. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Recognition program exists and is aligned to the company mission, and values (i.e. 
               
               
                   
                 “a one size fits all” type program). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Program includes multiple options including day-to-day, informal and formal 
               
               
                   
                 recognition aspects. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the maintenance of your organization&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 recognition program? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No ongoing maintenance or continuous improvement efforts are in place. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Ongoing maintenance performed annually. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Program objectives are defined with procedures in place for ongoing maintenance 
               
               
                   
                 and continuous improvement. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree is senior leadership involved in the management of the recognition 
               
               
                   
                 program? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Senior leadership does not sponsor a recognition program. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Senior leadership sponsors efforts but are not directly involved in defining the 
               
               
                   
                 program. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Senior leadership is directly involved in the creation of the recognition program and 
               
               
                   
                 provide ongoing support for alignment to business objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 How are employee preferences for non-monetary rewards considered? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Employee preferences for reward type is not considered. The reward type is 
               
               
                   
                 derived from the sponsoring teams goals and desires. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Employees have the opportunity to have input on reward types with a focus on 
               
               
                   
                 corporate culture (for example company party vs. a goody bag). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Individuals and teams provide input on reward types through employee surveys and 
               
               
                   
                 other mechanisms to a dedicated recognition team based on inputs. 
               
               
                   
                 How consistently and frequently do non-monetary rewards (i.e. movie tickets, goody 
               
               
                   
                 bags) align to individual performance? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Rewards are provided infrequently and inconsistently. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Rewards are provided frequently but inconsistently. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Rewards are provided frequently and consistently. 
               
               
                   
                 How are individuals made aware of the non-monetary recognition program? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Awareness is dependant on employee initiative to provide awareness of 
               
               
                   
                 recognition. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Leadership has the responsibility for communicating the rollout of the program. 
               
               
                   
                 Program objectives, processes, and events are reinforced through communications 
               
               
                   
                 using a variety of media (e-mails, brochures, class sessions). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Multiple levels of management are involved in the program rollout. Strategic 
               
               
                   
                 communication plans include a variety of media and reinforces program objectives and 
               
               
                   
                 processes, as well as communicating achievements and events. 
               
               
                   
                 How is participation in the company&#39;s recognition program measured? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Program participation is not tracked or is inconsistently tracked across the 
               
               
                   
                 company. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Program participation is closely tracked and measured across the company. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Program participation is aligned to employee satisfaction measurements and used 
               
               
                   
                 to refine future efforts within the recognition program. 
               
               
                 Retention 
                 How does your company capture the reasons why people leave? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - The company has an exit interview process for people leaving the company that 
               
               
                   
                 provides anecdotal feedback to HR. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The company has an exit interview process for people leaving the company that 
               
               
                   
                 feeds back anecdotal and high level quantitative information to the business unit&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 management team. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The company utilizes multiple methods (e.g. anonymous survey, HR interview, 
               
               
                   
                 attrition research, competitor analysis) for quantifying reasons for people leaving roles. 
               
               
                   
                 Where does your organization primarily focus its efforts to retain employees? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No formal retention program exists, or there is little or no differentiation based on 
               
               
                   
                 performance levels. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Retention programs primarily focus on top performers based on evaluations. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Retention programs primarily focus on individual levels of performance. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your company&#39;s understanding attrition reasons (the reasons 
               
               
                   
                 why people leave the company)? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The organization has a limited understanding of the levers that affect attrition. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Levers affecting attrition are validated with company experience and data which 
               
               
                   
                 points to the most common reasons why people leave the company. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The organization consistently enhances its understanding of why employees leave 
               
               
                   
                 as a result of conducting periodic attrition analysis (this process is characterized by the 
               
               
                   
                 company creating employee profiles by categorizing them by competencies, and skills. 
               
               
                   
                 As individuals leave, the organization can systematically analyze whether certain 
               
               
                   
                 employee types leave more often than others based on their competency/skill profiles). 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization align retention programs and processes to the reasons 
               
               
                   
                 why people leave? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Your organization does not fully understand the levers that affect attrition and are 
               
               
                   
                 not addressed by the retention process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Programs are defined for the retention processes but frequently do not correlate to 
               
               
                   
                 expected outcomes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Programs are defined and implemented for the entire talent lifecycle. The programs 
               
               
                   
                 directly impact attrition levers and maximize potential results. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are leadership performance metrics tied to the retention program? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Organizational leadership performance metrics are not tied to employee retention. 
               
               
                   
                 Leadership has no accountability for retention program success or failure. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Organizational leadership performance metrics are tied to high-level attrition data 
               
               
                   
                 only. Leadership is accountable for attrition rates, but not the success or failure of the 
               
               
                   
                 retention program. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Leadership performance metrics are directly tied to root causes of attrition as 
               
               
                   
                 indicators of overall success of the retention program. Leadership takes an active role 
               
               
                   
                 in the continuous improvement and refinement of the retention program. 
               
               
                 Performance 
                 Describe the extent that Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are established throughout 
               
               
                 Management 
                 the organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are not formally established. Independent 
               
               
                   
                 metrics are used to measure performance at various levels of the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are established within some levels of the 
               
               
                   
                 organization (usually the highest levels). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are established throughout all levels of the 
               
               
                   
                 organization and measure metrics performance against strategy and goals. 
               
               
                   
                 Describe the degree that overall business performance goals and targets are aligned 
               
               
                   
                 with individual goals and targets. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Overall business performance goals and targets are set across various levels of the 
               
               
                   
                 organization, but are not fully integrated with individual goals and targets. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Overall business performance goals and targets are set at all levels of the 
               
               
                   
                 organization and are mostly aligned with individual goals and targets. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Overall business performance goals and targets are set at all levels of the 
               
               
                   
                 organization, established using internal and external benchmarks, and are closely 
               
               
                   
                 aligned with individual goals and targets. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your company&#39;s performance management 
               
               
                   
                 systems or technology? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No performance management system and/or technology. Manual methods are 
               
               
                   
                 used to generate reports. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Dashboard technology exists with some automation in report generation. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Performance management system exists with automation of dashboards, 
               
               
                   
                 scorecards, and reports that identify root causes, trends and issues. 
               
               
                   
                 How is feedback incorporated into your performance management processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No formal Performance Management feedback processes other than year-end 
               
               
                   
                 reviews and beginning of the year goal establishment processes. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Performance. Management feedback processes include periodic performance 
               
               
                   
                 reviews (i.e. quarterly, semi-annually). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Performance management feedback processes are dynamically and iteratively 
               
               
                   
                 integrated into all key processes. 
               
               
                 Management 
                 How are Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) used in a dashboard? 
               
               
                 Dashboard 
                 1 - KPIs are not formally established and therefore not available in a dashboard. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some established KPIs are available in dashboards. Drill-down reporting is not 
               
               
                   
                 available for root cause analysis. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - All established KPIs are available in dashboards. Drill-down reporting for root cause 
               
               
                   
                 analysis is enabled. 
               
               
                   
                 How is your management dashboard managed and maintained? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No standardized procedures for security access or maintenance of dashboard. All 
               
               
                   
                 dashboards are able to be manipulated by all users. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Individual teams save and archive dashboards for ongoing maintenance while 
               
               
                   
                 publishing in read-only formats to enable security and data integrity. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Centralized management, maintenance, and security with change management 
               
               
                   
                 processes to modify the dashboard and review data integrity. 
               
               
                 Forecasting 
                 What tools are used for forecasting and scheduling? 
               
               
                 and 
                 1 - Forecasting and scheduling is done with basic tools (i.e. Excel). 
               
               
                 Scheduling 
                 3 - Forecasting and scheduling done within workforce management applications. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Dynamic forecasting and intra-day re-forecasting done within statistical modeling 
               
               
                   
                 packages (i.e. SAS; with system linkage to workforce management application). 
               
               
                   
                 Describe the forecasting models used by your organization to understand scheduling 
               
               
                   
                 impacts. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Forecasting models are not used to understand scheduling impacts. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Forecasting models based on historical trends are used to understand scheduling 
               
               
                   
                 impacts. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Forecasting models based on historical trends and statistical methods are used to 
               
               
                   
                 understand scheduling impacts. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your company&#39;s scheduling optimization 
               
               
                   
                 processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Scheduling optimization processes are not utilized, usually resulting in intentional 
               
               
                   
                 over-staffing to combat shrinkage. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Scheduling optimization processes are loosely aligned to call volume forecasts. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Scheduling optimization processes are integrally aligned with call volume forecasts, 
               
               
                   
                 and include web-based shift requests (bidding), and time-off requests that are 
               
               
                   
                 processed within a Workforce Management application. 
               
               
                   
                 Describe how shrinkage is managed within your call centers. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Shrinkage is not managed or understood, and viewed as an inevitable cost of doing 
               
               
                   
                 business. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Shrinkage is managed, but not in control (high shrinkage). 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 5 - Shrinkage is tightly managed and viewed as little more than stealing. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Which best describes how adherence, availability, and occupancy metrics are managed 
                   
               
               
                   
                 within your call centers. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 1 - Intra-day adherence, availability, and occupancy metrics are not established, 
                   
               
               
                   
                 3 - Intra-day adherence, availability, and occupancy metrics are established but usually 
                   
               
               
                   
                 not formally used to determine scheduling and forecasting. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 5 - Intra-day adherence, availability, and occupancy metrics are tracked with 
                   
               
               
                   
                 automated attendance notification systems, and are used to help optimize scheduling 
                   
               
               
                   
                 and forecasting. 
                   
               
               
                 Human Event 
                 How would you describe your company&#39;s event mitigation plans? 
                   
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - Mitigation plans focus on anecdotal and recent history with simplistic strategies for 
                   
               
               
                   
                 prevention. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 3 - Mitigation plans create categories and potential frequencies. Most critical workforce 
                   
               
               
                   
                 processes drive prevention plans. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 5 - Detailed risk analysis includes benchmarking and drives prevention plans to mitigate 
                   
               
               
                   
                 workforce issues. Budget is created and consumed for high risk scenario prevention 
                   
               
               
                   
                 activities. Frequent reevaluation of plans occurs due to customer market and social 
                   
               
               
                   
                 conditions. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s event response and recovery 
                   
               
               
                   
                 training program? 
                   
               
               
                   
                 1 - Preparation plans are rare, random efforts, with poorly defined responses to 
                   
               
               
                   
                 emergencies or critical, events. Formal training, exercises, and logistics analyses are 
                   
               
               
                   
                 rare or non-existent practices viewed as temporary inconveniences. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 3 - Preparation plans are intermittent efforts intended to ready an appropriate response 
                   
               
               
                   
                 to an emergency or a critical event. Formal training, exercises, and logistics analyses 
                   
               
               
                   
                 are semi-occasional practices viewed as standard policy fire-drills (e.g., voluntary 
                   
               
               
                   
                 emergency evacuations). 
                   
               
               
                   
                 5 - Preparation plans are ongoing, ranked, and prioritized efforts intended to ready an 
                   
               
               
                   
                 effective, rapid response to an emergency or critical event. Formal training, exercises, 
                   
               
               
                   
                 and logistics analyses are routine practices, rehearsed frequently, and viewed as a 
                   
               
               
                   
                 core competency in delivering value to customers, the community, workforce, and 
                   
               
               
                   
                 shareholders. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 10 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Exemplary organization of questions and exemplars associated with 
               
               
                 attributes and capabilities of a customer interaction domain 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Partner 
                 What factors does your organization take in to account when partnering with other 
               
               
                 Relationship 
                 companies? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - Partnerships are driven purely by cost considerations. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Partnerships are driven by cost structure and general alignment of business goals 
               
               
                   
                 across organizations. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Partnerships are driven by a shared business strategy and a strong understanding 
               
               
                   
                 of each other&#39;s core competencies. 
               
               
                   
                 What is the incentive structure your organization shares with your partners? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Incentive structures are mutually exclusive and result in behaviors that may 
               
               
                   
                 negatively impact the customer experience. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Incentive structures are mutually exclusive but aligned toward customer needs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The contracts your organization negotiates with your partners focuses on a shared 
               
               
                   
                 incentive structure to meet customer needs. 
               
               
                   
                 How are partner processes defined? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Process flows are separate and distinct for each company with understanding of 
               
               
                   
                 handoffs at critical points. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Process flows are integrated between companies with detailed understanding of 
               
               
                   
                 handoff criteria for each. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Process streams are compatible between companies and aligned to customer 
               
               
                   
                 needs. Process streams are continuously evaluated for the value they add and 
               
               
                   
                 designed to reinforce efficient handoffs. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the accountability and understanding of customer 
               
               
                   
                 ownership with your organization&#39;s partners? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Accountability for performance, and an understanding of customer ownership is ill- 
               
               
                   
                 defined. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Your organization has established an internal scorecard designed to monitor your 
               
               
                   
                 partners ability to meet the performance metrics as outlined in the partnership contract. 
               
               
                   
                 Each party recognizes shared customer ownership. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Organization and partner have a shared scorecard that is established based on the 
               
               
                   
                 ability to meet customer needs, and highlights opportunities to continuously add value 
               
               
                   
                 to the customer and partner relationship. 
               
               
                 Integrated 
                 Which statement best describes your partner performance evaluation process? 
               
               
                 Customer 
                 1 - Views of partnership performance are generally one-sided and disputable due to 
               
               
                 Data 
                 lack of visibility. 
               
               
                 Management 
                 3 - Shared performance metrics are agreed upon but customer data inconsistencies 
               
               
                   
                 result in limited reliability. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Shared performance metrics are developed around consistent and reliable data 
               
               
                   
                 between organization and partners, ensuring partner relationship management 
               
               
                   
                 accountability. 
               
               
                 Integrated 
                 To what extent does your organization share customer records with your partners? 
               
               
                 Workflow 
                 1 - Partners have limited or no cross-systems access, frequently building a unique 
               
               
                 Management 
                 customer record in their own systems. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Partners are required to simultaneously access multiple, un-integrated systems and 
               
               
                   
                 often re-key all relevant information. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Compatible and complimentary workflow tools are integrated between organization 
               
               
                   
                 and partners that provide a unified view of the customer, with sufficient information and 
               
               
                   
                 collaborative workflows to address customer needs. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are shared processes supported by systems with your partners? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Shared processes between organization and partners are characterized by multiple 
               
               
                   
                 handoffs and overcoming multiple obstacles in order to meet the customer fulfillment 
               
               
                   
                 requirements of each organization. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Shared processes have explicit entrance and exit criteria handoff points while 
               
               
                   
                 system support may be limited. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Shared processes are supported by integrated systems for seamless handoff 
               
               
                   
                 efficiency. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your visibility into partner workflow status and 
               
               
                   
                 issues (i.e. a call center agent creating a ticket to dispatch field support for a customer)? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Workflow status and issues are primarily communicated manually (e.g. email, 
               
               
                   
                 phone) between organization and partners. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Workflow status and issues are communicated via standardized reports, based on a 
               
               
                   
                 discrete view from each organization. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Workflow status and issues are provided real-time based on information originating 
               
               
                   
                 in both organization and partner systems. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following statements best describes the level of communication your 
               
               
                   
                 organization has with it&#39;s partners? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Management focuses on maximizing process efficiencies with little or no interaction 
               
               
                   
                 with partners. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Periodic reviews between organization and partnership management are scheduled 
               
               
                   
                 to review shared process performance metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Daily interactions amongst organization and partner managers are held to set 
               
               
                   
                 goals, minimize process variation, and collectively address workflow improvement 
               
               
                   
                 opportunities. 
               
               
                 Sales 
                 To what extent are your product and service strategies aligned with sales goals? 
               
               
                 Force 
                 1 - Product and service strategies are not aligned with sales goals. 
               
               
                 Alignment 
                 3 - Product and service strategies developed by marketing management drive the 
               
               
                   
                 development of sales goals, of which only sales leadership has accountability for 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Product and service strategies are developed by marketing and sales management 
               
               
                   
                 and drive the development of sales goals, which all parties are accountable for. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your sales organization structure? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Product/service offerings define sales teams and overall organization(s). Product 
               
               
                   
                 quotas are used to support strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Market segmentation needs drive alignment of sales organization. Quotas focus on 
               
               
                   
                 product suites. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Sales organization is defined by customer segmentation. Sales force alignment to 
               
               
                   
                 customer lifetime value facilitates achievement of business strategy and revenue 
               
               
                   
                 generation. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe the relationship between your company&#39;s sales and marketing 
               
               
                   
                 organizations? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Sales and Marketing are not aligned and are driven by disparate goals and 
               
               
                   
                 objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Sales and Marketing groups are informally aligned and have partnerships based on 
               
               
                   
                 perceived benefits of individual organizations. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Sales and Marketing leadership are equal owners of revenue goals and are 
               
               
                   
                 accountable for meeting them. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your sales talent management program? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Sales talent management programs exist but many times compete with other 
               
               
                   
                 programs or have vague goals. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Sales talent management programs exist in many areas to align sales force to 
               
               
                   
                 functional areas of expertise and meet functional goals. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Cohesive sales talent management programs incorporate training, incentives, 
               
               
                   
                 mentoring, monitoring and overall employee empowerment to enable achievement of 
               
               
                   
                 quantitative results. 
               
               
                 Opportunity 
                 To what extent does customer data drive your company&#39;s sales insight? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - Marketing research drives product definition and narrow view of sales opportunities 
               
               
                   
                 in market. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Rudimentary tools are used to garner insight into customer purchasing practices 
               
               
                   
                 within market segments (i.e. forecast, actual sales units over time, surveys) and define 
               
               
                   
                 potential customer opportunities. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Thorough analysis of customer interaction data drives understanding of customer 
               
               
                   
                 purchasing criteria and buying habits. Insight is used for ongoing refinement of sales 
               
               
                   
                 and product lifecycles, and to provide near real-time feedback to sales force. 
               
               
                   
                 How are marketing campaigns created in your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - ad-hoc marketing processes are developed around product offering and passed on 
               
               
                   
                 to sales leadership to meet market demand. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Marketing works with sales to understand market needs. A formalized process 
               
               
                   
                 drives program definition and messaging materials. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Marketing and sales co-author all campaigns. A formal standardized process 
               
               
                   
                 culminates in discrete criteria for messaging, positioning based on needs, availability, 
               
               
                   
                 and customer incentives (e.g. pricing, bundling). 
               
               
                   
                 How are forecasting and sales pipelines used in your opportunity management 
               
               
                   
                 strategy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Forecasts are created prior to product launch and based on business strategy for 
               
               
                   
                 meeting revenue. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Forecasts are created prior to product launch by market segmentation and 
               
               
                   
                 infrequently updated. Informal understanding of sales pipeline exists. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Sales pipeline and forecasts are created using customer segmentation and updated 
               
               
                   
                 frequently based on sales success and customer satisfaction data, and used to define 
               
               
                   
                 realistic sales quotas. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your sales lead generation practices? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - ad-hoc lead generation methodology is quota-driven solely within Sales 
               
               
                   
                 organization. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Marketing and Sales share a collaborative standard process for identification and 
               
               
                   
                 quantification of leads. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Business-logic desktop sales technologies generate new/additive leads, identify 
               
               
                   
                 products, and create value propositions that are continuously refined by Marketing and 
               
               
                   
                 Sales leadership. 
               
               
                   
                 How are your sales prospects qualified? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Prospects are rarely formally qualified. Primary sales goal is to sell as many units 
               
               
                   
                 as possible. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Prospects are qualified based on product pre-requisites. Stronger sales 
               
               
                   
                 representatives perform some amount of matching to product needs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Prospects are qualified based on evaluation of product pre-requisites, buying 
               
               
                   
                 history, and customer needs. Automated credit authorization is integrated into the 
               
               
                   
                 qualification toolset for applicable sales. 
               
               
                 Transaction 
                 Which statement best describes your marketing messaging? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - Marketing message timing is inconsistent, generally provided at launch of 
               
               
                   
                 campaign, and frequently relies on sales force interpretation. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Marketing messaging is detailed, accurate, and consistently provided at launch of 
               
               
                   
                 campaign. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Marketing messaging is supported by technology that provides accurate information 
               
               
                   
                 in a cohesive fashion prior and during the point of sale. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes product positioning and expectation setting during 
               
               
                   
                 a sale? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Basic product positioning materials are created based on product requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 Majority focus on sales quotas inhibits sales expectation setting. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Marketing segmentation drives product positioning materials during sale. Limited 
               
               
                   
                 amount of sales expectation setting performed by stronger sales staff and 
               
               
                   
                 management. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer segmentation and purchase feedback drives product positioning 
               
               
                   
                 materials to enable offer generations that are aligned with customer needs. 
               
               
                   
                 Expectations are consistently set that align with ability to fulfill customer needs. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe understanding of cross sell/up sell opportunities during a 
               
               
                   
                 customer transaction? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Knowledge or understanding of company&#39;s or individual business unit product mix is 
               
               
                   
                 limited. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Basic understanding of product mix and associated capabilities provides ad-hoc 
               
               
                   
                 capability to sell other products and services. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Holistic understanding of products and services is able to be integrated with each 
               
               
                   
                 customer&#39;s needs to maximize opportunities for complimentary products and/or 
               
               
                   
                 services. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your scripting tools for sales transactions? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No scripting tools or one size fits all scripting tools are provided focused on base 
               
               
                   
                 product capabilities. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Marketing segmentation-driven scripting tools that are provided at product launch 
               
               
                   
                 with variations designed to meet each market&#39;s needs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Situational scripting tools aligned to customer segment are standard and continually 
               
               
                   
                 refined based on success throughout product lifecycle. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your organization&#39;s sales workforce alignment? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Little or sporadic attempts to drive workforce capabilities with quotas as primary 
               
               
                   
                 vehicle. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Quotas and incentive plans are standard practice and generally support similar 
               
               
                   
                 objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Quotas, Incentives, staffing needs, and evaluations are specifically inter-related and 
               
               
                   
                 support a defined customer value optimization strategy. 
               
               
                 Post Sales 
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s sales wrap-up process? 
               
               
                 Support 
                 1 - Product or service purchased is reviewed through a simple scripted sales recap 
               
               
                   
                 with customer. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Product or service purchased is reviewed with customer highlighting some benefits 
               
               
                   
                 and/or anecdotal, potential issues. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Data driven, targeted highlight of benefits and issues is performed prior to sale 
               
               
                   
                 close. Emphasis on achieving customer delight via thorough recap of product or 
               
               
                   
                 service offering purchased and future self-help resources integrated with reemphasis of 
               
               
                   
                 customer needs. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your sales fulfillment entrance criteria? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Job aids and informal siloed knowledge serve as reminders for fulfillment criteria 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Job aids and some system guardrails ensure critical information is completed prior 
               
               
                   
                 to order submission. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Order capture tools are designed and implemented based on downstream 
               
               
                   
                 fulfillment needs. 
               
               
                   
                 How are downstream fulfillment workflows initiated? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - More than one system is needed to transition order to fulfillment with little or 
               
               
                   
                 insufficient integration. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Integration of systems present for most common order types. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Closure of sales initiates full integration into downstream fulfillment processes for all 
               
               
                   
                 order types. 
               
               
                   
                 How do you measure the effectiveness of your post sales processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - General customer satisfaction metrics are used as a primary indicator of how much 
               
               
                   
                 the organization&#39;s products and/or services exceeded customer needs (customer 
               
               
                   
                 delight) 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some internal data is used for increased understanding of customer delight but 
               
               
                   
                 infrequently tied to performance targets. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer satisfaction, churn rates, post sale inquires and fulfillment reject rates are 
               
               
                   
                 evaluated against pre-established targets. Root cause analysis is integrated into 
               
               
                   
                 Marketing and Sales processes. 
               
               
                 Billing 
                 Which statement best describes how your company&#39;s billing system(s) are integrated? 
               
               
                 Strategy &amp; 
                 1 - Multiple independent systems centered around products and/or segmentation 
               
               
                 Approach 
                 strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Multiple systems with varying levels of integration which are dependent on manual 
               
               
                   
                 process steps to support data flow. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Systems deployed enterprise-wide and allow convergence of billing data across 
               
               
                   
                 multiple lines of business with flexibility for end to end integration to meet business 
               
               
                   
                 conditions internally or externally. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your billing system functionality? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Systems frequently require manual intervention to generate accurate bills. Higher 
               
               
                   
                 level functionality is rarely pursued due to manual support costs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Systems can accurately generate bills but may be inflexible to growth or business 
               
               
                   
                 changes. Higher level functionality is focused on pricing capabilities (e.g. promotions, 
               
               
                   
                 discounts). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Robust, scalable and flexible billing platform with ability to handle multiple sources 
               
               
                   
                 of complex data simultaneously and higher level billing functions (e.g. promotions, 
               
               
                   
                 renewals, disconnects, regulatory and tax). 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are contract and pricing management systems integrated with your 
               
               
                   
                 billing system? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Siloed contract management, pricing management, billing, metering, and revenue 
               
               
                   
                 function. Management of data with multiple systems. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Contract management, pricing management, billing, metering and revenue 
               
               
                   
                 functions are, partially integrated. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Contract and pricing data flows directly into core financial processes which are 
               
               
                   
                 integrated with billing. 
               
               
                 Rating 
                 Which statement best describes your billing rating engine functionality? 
               
               
                 Products 
                 1 - The rating engine is static rating engine with limited flexibility for rule changes. 
               
               
                 and/or 
                 Disparate rating and promotion rules established without target customer consideration. 
               
               
                 Services 
                 3 - The rating engine has partial flexibility for limited identification of events. The focus 
               
               
                   
                 is on maintenance of static services (e.g. postpaid billing, prepaid billing, mediation, 
               
               
                   
                 network). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The rating engine is a highly configurable, real-time rating engine that can charge 
               
               
                   
                 for any type of event, based on any customer or service attribute. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your service bundling options as they relate to bill delivery? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There are no service bundling options, and limited cross product discounting 
               
               
                   
                 functions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There are limited service bundling options as well as restricted discounting 
               
               
                   
                 functions which are business-centric as opposed to customer centric. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There are rating and promotion rules to match pricing and promotion needs to 
               
               
                   
                 specific target customers. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the capabilities of your rating engine? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Separate bills for separate products/services are generated by separate rating 
               
               
                   
                 systern(s) for unique services. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Multiple products/services can be rated by a single rating engine. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Multi-service bundling and cross-product discounting functions available as part of 
               
               
                   
                 the rating process. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your change management capabilities for rate changes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Rate changes and promotional pricing is problematic across multiple channels and 
               
               
                   
                 systems or requires extensive coding and testing. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Repetitive, manual coding and testing is required to manage rate changes and 
               
               
                   
                 pricing for new products and services. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is the ability to set and test rate changes and transfer to production without 
               
               
                   
                 costly development cycles. 
               
               
                 Billing  
                 How does your organization define billing cycles? 
               
               
                 Cycle 
                 1 - Billing cycles are defined by the business with no customization for customer 
               
               
                 Management 
                 preference/need. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some bill cycle flexibility is available to address customer preferences and/or 
               
               
                   
                 business needs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Billing cycles are available to address customer needs or flexibility based on 
               
               
                   
                 company billing efficiencies (e.g. geography, customer segmentation, cycle leveling). 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree is your organization able to process multiple invoice types in a single 
               
               
                   
                 billing cycle? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Only a single invoice type can be handled in a single cycle. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Detailed and/or summary invoices are handled within a single bill cycle. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Detailed and/or summary invoices are handled within a single bill cycle, along with 
               
               
                   
                 the ability to handle retail and/or wholesale statements. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your billing system&#39;s ability to back-out and re- 
               
               
                   
                 bill? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Cycle back-out and re-bill requires manual processes. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Cycle back-out and re-bill are automated. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Partial cycle back-out and re-bill are automated. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your billing system accommodate billing cycle changes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Unable to change bill cycles. New accounts must be established in order to 
               
               
                   
                 complete bill cycle changes. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Manual changes are required to move customers from one cycle to another. If 
               
               
                   
                 liability is transferred from one account to another, the cycle must be manually changed 
               
               
                   
                 first. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Changes to account hierarchy structures and transfer of liability will automatically 
               
               
                   
                 change the bill cycles of the accounts without causing billing problems. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your billing system&#39;s ability to prorate charges? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No pro-ration of price plans or discounts. Bill cycle must start on account inception 
               
               
                   
                 date or accounts will not be activated until the next cycle begins. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Pro-ration of price plans based on cycle definition, but no proration of discounts. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Pro-ration of price plans and discounts based on cycle definition and management. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following statements best describes your billing cycle processing? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Ability to run one bill cycle at a time with no overlap. System is in place to manage 
               
               
                   
                 bill cycle production but has no ability to view status of each process step or to 
               
               
                   
                 start/stop individual processes. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Ability to run only one bill cycle at a time. Robust systems are in place to manage 
               
               
                   
                 bill cycle production and ability to start/stop billing steps. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Ability to run multiple billing cycles at one time. Robust systems are in place to 
               
               
                   
                 manage bill cycle production and start/stop cycle steps. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following statements best describes your billing cycle verification process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Cycle verification process is highly manual, leading to significant cycle release 
               
               
                   
                 delays. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Bill cycle verification process combines automated checks and manual approval, 
               
               
                   
                 adding to the total cycle time. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Automated processes are in place to validate bill content and to create reports for 
               
               
                   
                 review of exceptions and valid bill content. 
               
               
                 Promotion 
                 Which statement best describes how your organization&#39;s billing system(s) support 
               
               
                 Management 
                 targeted promotions efforts? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The systems support promotions that are not targeted to a particular customer 
               
               
                   
                 segment or based on patterns of service. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The systems support promotions targeted to pre-defined groups of customers 
               
               
                   
                 based off of high level channel strategy and general customer demographics. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The systems support targeted and personalized promotions and campaigns, pricing 
               
               
                   
                 based on particular patterns of service to particular customers. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s pricing strategy in regard to 
               
               
                   
                 promotion management? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There are only single price points at the customer and product level with 
               
               
                   
                 fragmented ability for adjustments. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The organization has pricing matrices which incorporate a limited set of product 
               
               
                   
                 features and customer demographics. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There are multi-tier, rules-based pricing matrices to manage base prices and 
               
               
                   
                 adjustment at the customer and product level. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are you able to measure the effectiveness of pricing and promotional 
               
               
                   
                 strategies? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is limited capability to accurately measure the effectiveness of pricing 
               
               
                   
                 strategies. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There is the ability to measure effectiveness of pricing strategies within channels 
               
               
                   
                 and promotions. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is the ability to measure effectiveness of pricing strategies across multiple 
               
               
                   
                 channels and promotions. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree is your organization able to optimize your promotional efforts? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is a “one-size-fits-all” approach with little analysis or differentiation between 
               
               
                   
                 promotional strategies. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There is a limited ability to generate targeted promotional investments driven by 
               
               
                   
                 analysis and anecdotal data. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is an analytical, evidence-based approach to optimize promotional 
               
               
                   
                 investments and generate more effective and economical promotional strategies. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your firm utilize third party Partners in conjunction with your 
               
               
                   
                 promotional efforts? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No use of third party partners or affiliation programs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Limited use of third party partners or affiliation programs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Incorporation of third party and partner advertising and promotions. 
               
               
                 Revenue 
                 Which of the following best describes your revenue assurance methodology? 
               
               
                 Assurance 
                 1 - One-time fix solution. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Series of point solutions driven by professional services audits of departments. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Iterative, enterprise-wide undertaking with transaction evaluation through the entire 
               
               
                   
                 revenue lifecycle. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s revenue assurance 
               
               
                   
                 department? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is no formal revenue assurance department. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There is a revenue assurance department or function however it is not well defined 
               
               
                   
                 nor aligned. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is a specific revenue assurance department or function with a well defined 
               
               
                   
                 and repeatable methodology. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s revenue assurance system 
               
               
                   
                 capabilities? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is an exception-based billing reconciliation with a manual administrative 
               
               
                   
                 process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There is an automated trend reporting and alignment of revenue streams to general 
               
               
                   
                 ledger during the billing process, but not during the rating process. There is a lack of 
               
               
                   
                 root cause analysis on problems that are identified. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is an automated revenue leakage detection to drive root cause analysis. 
               
               
                   
                 There is also the ability to create trending during real time, rating in order to detect and 
               
               
                   
                 fix problems prior to billing. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes ownership of the revenue assurance function in your 
               
               
                   
                 organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Billing group control and responsibility. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Department head control and responsibility. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Executive control and responsibility. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent is the revenue assurance function of your organization involved in 
               
               
                   
                 process development? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Revenue assurance function is not considered in the current process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Business processes are reactively adapted to fix revenue leaks. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Revenue assurance function is a key input to process development and cost 
               
               
                   
                 management, particularly in product/service development process. 
               
               
                 Routing 
                 Which statement best describes your company&#39;s customer routing solutions within 
               
               
                   
                 communication channels? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Homegrown solutions supporting basic communication channels that have unique 
               
               
                   
                 routing needs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Discreet, proprietary solutions allow partial integration across channels. Varying 
               
               
                   
                 levels of multi-channel support exist and include moderate to high IT support. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Single communications platform that supports voice, automated voice, chat, agent- 
               
               
                   
                 assisted chat, email, web, guided speech IVR, speech recognition enabling multi- 
               
               
                   
                 channel routing with minimal IT support. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how customer data is presented to agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Historical customer data is presented to agents without integrated customer view 
               
               
                   
                 across channels. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Historical customer data is presented to agents with standardized scripting and 
               
               
                   
                 treatment options across multiple interaction channels. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Contextually-driven customer data is presented to agents through integrated 
               
               
                   
                 interaction channels that enables personalized scripting, positioning, and overall 
               
               
                   
                 messaging. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the business logic and rules used to route customers 
               
               
                   
                 to appropriate queues? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Business logic &amp; rules for routing customers to the optimal queue is basic and 
               
               
                   
                 frequently results in transfers to other queues. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Business logic &amp; rules for routing customers to the optimal queue is sufficiently 
               
               
                   
                 developed and often unique per channel. They are usually duplicated across channels 
               
               
                   
                 and sites with high dependence on IT coding, revisions and updates. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Business logic &amp; rules for routing customers to ideal queues are based on customer 
               
               
                   
                 segmentation, need, value, and complexity. Interaction channels are usually integrated 
               
               
                   
                 and have quality control processes for additional business rules. 
               
               
                   
                 What types of metrics are used to determine how a customer is routed? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Volume-based metrics (e.g. calls per hour, queue size, abandonment) are used to 
               
               
                   
                 determine how a customer is routed. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Agent performance metrics (e.g. contacts per agent, handle time, utilization, first 
               
               
                   
                 call resolution) are used to determine how a customer is routed. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Agent performance metrics and customer interaction metrics (e.g. escalation rate, 
               
               
                   
                 transfer rate, cross-sell/up-sell) are correlated to determine how a customer is routed. 
               
               
                   
                 Describe your call routing strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Call routing strategy is based on core products or services. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Call routing strategy is based on market segmentation of core products or services . 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Call routing strategy is based on market and customer segmentation of core 
               
               
                   
                 products or services. 
               
               
                 Contact 
                 Which statement best describes your company&#39;s contact handling strategy? 
               
               
                 Handling 
                 1 - Contact handling strategy is based on current technology and agent skill sets. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Goals and targets for handling interactions define the handling strategy, technology, 
               
               
                   
                 and skill set requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Correlated customer interaction data, segmentation data, and operational costs 
               
               
                   
                 drive the goals and targets for handling interactions that define the handling strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 What are the primary goals of your company&#39;s contact handling strategy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The primary goal is minimizing interaction time. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The primary goal is meeting acceptable service and customer satisfaction levels 
               
               
                   
                 while staying within handle time targets. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The Primary goal is maximizing customer service and satisfaction levels. 
               
               
                   
                 What types of contact scenarios are used to create contact handling processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Contact handling processes are created from a small set of customer contact 
               
               
                   
                 scenarios that represent the most common contact reasons. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Contact handling processes are created from customer contact scenarios that 
               
               
                   
                 represent the most common contact reasons across all interaction channels. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Contact handling processes are created from customer contact scenarios that 
               
               
                   
                 represent channel-specific interactions, and regularly refined against current customer 
               
               
                   
                 interaction data. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe the basic technology that supports contact handling? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - ACD (Automated Call Distribution) technology allows customers to navigate to 
               
               
                   
                 correct agent. Pre-agent information and transactional capabilities are not available to 
               
               
                   
                 the customer. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - IVR and web services technology allows customers to navigate to correct agent. 
               
               
                   
                 Basic information and transactional capabilities are available to the customer. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Robust IVR and web services technologies include integrated customer views so 
               
               
                   
                 customers can get to the correct agent. High level of support for self-service customer 
               
               
                   
                 transactions (e.g. submit a ticket, dispute bill, pay bill). 
               
               
                   
                 What types of information or transactional capabilities are available to the customer 
               
               
                   
                 before reaching an agent? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Basic information and transactional capabilities are not available to the customer. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Basic information and transactional capabilities are available to the customer. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - High level of support for self-service customer transactions (e.g. submit a ticket, 
               
               
                   
                 dispute bill, pay bill). 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree are agent contact handling tasks automated? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Some automation of agent tasks that present basic customer information after initial 
               
               
                   
                 information is entered manually (e.g. auto-fill or customer search capabilities). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some automation of agent tasks such as pre-populated customer and account info 
               
               
                   
                 from IVR. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Most agent workflows are automated (e.g. pre-populated account, complete 
               
               
                   
                 fulfillment, post call wrap-up). 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes how contact handling metrics are used to schedule 
               
               
                   
                 agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Basic contact handling metrics (e.g. volume, average handle time, abandonment 
               
               
                   
                 are manually used to schedule agents. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Intra-day contact handling metrics and performance targets are integrated into 
               
               
                   
                 workforce management (WFM) tools to optimize agent schedules. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Intra-day contact handling metrics and performance targets are integrated into 
               
               
                   
                 workforce management (WFM) tools to optimize agent schedules, and model optimal 
               
               
                   
                 contact handling strategies. 
               
               
                   
                 What types of self-service technology exists for customers, for the purposes of reducing 
               
               
                   
                 call volume? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer-facing web portals with limited self-service capabilities. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer-facing web portals are primary vehicle with varying levels of functionality 
               
               
                   
                 based on market needs for product and/or service. Evaluation of effectiveness is ad- 
               
               
                   
                 hoc or infrequent. Agents input underutilized in design and implementation. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Organization has a well defined self-service strategy that includes multiple 
               
               
                   
                 platforms with a primary goal to decrease call volume. Customer segmentation and 
               
               
                   
                 analysis of contacts is frequently evaluated to drive increased functionality. Agent input 
               
               
                   
                 is utilized in design and implementation. 
               
               
                 Resolution 
                 Which statement best describes your contact resolution strategy? 
               
               
                 Workflow 
                 1 - Contact resolution is a limited part of overall strategy with greater focus on call 
               
               
                 Management 
                 handling time. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Contact resolution is a part of the contact center strategy, including agent training in 
               
               
                   
                 technology solutions (i.e. Customer Relationship Management (CRM)). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - First Call Resolution (FCR) is an integral part of contact handling strategy, including 
               
               
                   
                 routing, and agent training in technology solutions and performance coaching. 
               
               
                   
                 Advanced CRM technologies are designed and implemented to support follow-up, 
               
               
                   
                 escalations, and thresholds. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the customer interaction applications that support 
               
               
                   
                 your call resolution workflows? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Multiple applications are used to support call resolution workflows, with little or no 
               
               
                   
                 ability to provide a comprehensive view of the customer. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Integrated applications are used to support call resolution workflows, and provide a 
               
               
                   
                 comprehensive customer view within individual interaction channels. Limited customer 
               
               
                   
                 information is integrated into workflows. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Single platform applications are used to support call resolution workflows, and 
               
               
                   
                 provide a comprehensive customer view with access to real-time and historical 
               
               
                   
                 information across interaction channels. Customer information is integrated into 
               
               
                   
                 workflows. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent do knowledge management systems support call resolution workflows? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No formal knowledge management system exists, and access to a knowledge 
               
               
                   
                 database is limited or restricted. Call resolution mostly relies on agent knowledge and 
               
               
                   
                 manual documentation, 
               
               
                   
                 3 - No formal knowledge management system exists, but a knowledge database with 
               
               
                   
                 static and dynamic features, usually having advanced problem/solution search 
               
               
                   
                 capabilities, can be accessed. Call resolution mostly relies on agent knowledge and 
               
               
                   
                 manual documentation. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A formal knowledge management system is used to support call resolution 
               
               
                   
                 workflows. Call resolution is supported by system functions that include advice-based 
               
               
                   
                 responses within process steps, augmenting agent knowledge and manual 
               
               
                   
                 documentation. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are call resolution workflows supported by systems? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Call resolution workflows are not supported by systems or may be scripted for call 
               
               
                   
                 resolution. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Call resolution workflows are supported by systems with formal, static workflow 
               
               
                   
                 scripting rules that are modeled on pre-determined common customer scenarios. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Call resolution workflows are supported by systems with automated dynamic scripts 
               
               
                   
                 based on customer, product, agent, and skill level. Step-by-step rules-driven workflows 
               
               
                   
                 utilize automated customer and interaction data. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes where call resolution workflow metrics are derived? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Contact resolution metrics are primarily derived from customer satisfaction scores. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Contact resolution metrics are derived from customer satisfaction scores and other 
               
               
                   
                 internal metrics (e.g. contact reason callbacks, handle time, time between callbacks). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Contact resolution metrics are derived from customer satisfaction scores, other 
               
               
                   
                 internal metrics (e.g. contact reason callbacks, handle time, time between callbacks), 
               
               
                   
                 and supplemented with external survey data to assess the contact resolution strategy 
               
               
                   
                 and optimal targets. 
               
               
                 Voice 
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s network platform technology 
               
               
                   
                 in regards to connecting a customer to call center agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Main focus is on routing of calls using DTMF, rather than speech or natural 
               
               
                   
                 language, without attempting to complete transactions or resolve issues within the 
               
               
                   
                 automated system. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some use of advanced speech recognition providing automation for transactional 
               
               
                   
                 and informational resolutions. Speech vocabulary is not developed to handle more 
               
               
                   
                 advanced transactions. The interface is consistent. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Advanced speech recognition is integrated into all levels for consistent and effective 
               
               
                   
                 resolution rate for transactional and informational issues. Full set of vocabularies to 
               
               
                   
                 enable effective self-service completion across all areas including Natural Language 
               
               
                   
                 Recognition. 
               
               
                   
                 Please describe the navigation functionality of your ACD or IVR technology. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Single level ACD or IVR with limited path selection and functionality. Little or no 
               
               
                   
                 capability for containment. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Multi-level IVR delivered through tactically engineered hierarchy. Contact 
               
               
                   
                 containment strategies are employed based on technology capabilities. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Multi-level IVR delivered through strategically engineered hierarchy with continual 
               
               
                   
                 call flow analysis feeding containment strategies. Agent input into design and customer 
               
               
                   
                 interface. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are you able to capture and analyze ACD/IVR metrics? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Limited ability to captured information on ACD/IVR transactional completion rates or 
               
               
                   
                 customer navigation paths. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Detailed metrics on ACD/IVR completion rates drive periodic review and redesign of 
               
               
                   
                 menu and path hierarchy. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Extensive metrics and path analysis on ACD/IVR containment and transfer rates 
               
               
                   
                 refines understanding of customer needs. Continual evolvement of navigation path 
               
               
                   
                 blends from analysis of customer needs, containment strategy and usability. 
               
               
                   
                 Please describe the level of functionality contained within your voice routing technology. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Account functionality basic with limited transactional services (e.g. history, balance 
               
               
                   
                 inquiry and payment service). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Account functionality consists of a comprehensive view of customer information 
               
               
                   
                 with transactional capabilities (e.g. history, payment services, account update, feature 
               
               
                   
                 additions and billing information). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Fully integrated, fully functioning account management services, service ticketing 
               
               
                   
                 and billing dispute resolution is available to consumers, mirroring live agent capability. 
               
               
                 Web &amp; Chat 
                 How does your company&#39;s website present customer service or troubleshooting 
               
               
                   
                 information to customers? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) are available to customers utilizing links on the 
               
               
                   
                 website. There is limited to no search functionality incorporated into the website. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customers can access a knowledge base through an FAQ. Customers are also 
               
               
                   
                 able to search the website contents via a key word search feature. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Fully integrated knowledge base supporting consumer inquiries with real-time 
               
               
                   
                 resolutions through the use of a natural language search. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your website&#39;s sales and sales support 
               
               
                   
                 functionality? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Sales and sales support functionality is limited to product and service, profiles with 
               
               
                   
                 little or no support of order taking or escalation to live agent for sales order questions 
               
               
                   
                 and completion. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Detailed product and service offerings are arranged in intuitive groupings based 
               
               
                   
                 upon market segmentation. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Website functionality includes a real-time shopping cart, cross-sell/up-sell before 
               
               
                   
                 and during checkout and order tracking capabilities are updated automatically. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your service ticketing processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Service issues are not qualified. Ticket creation requires customer to input product 
               
               
                   
                 details and customer information. Live agent follow-up contact is required to gain 
               
               
                   
                 additional detail. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Service issues are qualified via basic templates. Ticket creation contains some 
               
               
                   
                 validation of customer and product information prior to submission. Live agent 
               
               
                   
                 follow-up contact is frequently required. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Interactive troubleshooting and service issue qualification integrated into workflow. 
               
               
                   
                 Customer and product information are gathered as natural steps when unable to 
               
               
                   
                 resolve. Complete, validated ticket results with infrequent need for agent follow-up. 
               
               
                   
                 If available, how is online chat functionality utilized on your company&#39;s website? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Chat channel is offered indiscriminately throughout the website. Little or no scripting 
               
               
                   
                 support to gather information and resolve customer inquiry. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Chat channel is available on website ‘Contact Us’ pages. Used as contact mitigation 
               
               
                   
                 rather than revenue driving channel. Agents utilize auto-scripting and use Frequently 
               
               
                   
                 Used Sayings to resolve customer issue. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Automated scripts provided for simple to resolve contacts using existing website 
               
               
                   
                 functionality. Chat is strategically offered when customer issue complexity is 
               
               
                   
                 high or is deemed high value (revenue, drop-out, up-sell). 
               
               
                 Email 
                 To what degree is your agent e-mail system integrated with network technologies in 
               
               
                   
                 your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Email is on a homegrown platform with limited integration across network 
               
               
                   
                 technologies. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Incoming e-mail is integrated with network technologies to enable basic attachment 
               
               
                   
                 functionality to customer accounts. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Incoming and outgoing e-mail are facilitated and captured within the CRM platform 
               
               
                   
                 becoming an integrated part of account history. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are you able to qualify customer issues through your e-mail channel 
               
               
                   
                 prior to receipt by an agent? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Little or no information gathering performed prior to email submission. Customers 
               
               
                   
                 are simply given an email address. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Email integrated into website and uses standard template to quality issues for 
               
               
                   
                 routing purposes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Integrated website email with parsing intelligence to evaluate customer and issue 
               
               
                   
                 qualification to provide real-time resolution when available. 
               
               
                   
                 Please describe the auto-response functionality of your e-mail system. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Basic auto-response acknowledges receipt of email. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Basic contextual auto-response capabilities based on defined templates. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Advanced auto-response with hyperlinks to knowledge base and two-way customer 
               
               
                   
                 update capability that provides for a single customer record of all interactions. 
               
               
                   
                 With regard to your e-mail system, which of the following best describes your 
               
               
                   
                 organization&#39;s issue resolution process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Individual contact responses are written free-hand, by the agent, for each individual 
               
               
                   
                 response. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Issue resolution is completed by the agent via auto-populated templates to ensure 
               
               
                   
                 consistent messaging. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Subsequent contact is facilitated via auto-populated content generated from issue 
               
               
                   
                 categorization and/or resolution. Inclusion of context sensitive information includes 
               
               
                   
                 knowledge base links and customized cross-sell/up-sell based on customer needs. 
               
               
                 Live Agent 
                 Please describe your network platform across all live agent contact channels. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Multiple network technologies are utilized for each interaction channel (Chat, Email, 
               
               
                   
                 Phone) which require separate queue management. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Single network technology per interaction channel is integrated via separate 
               
               
                   
                 solutions to provide a holistic queue structure. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - IP Telephony/Network-centric technology unifying contact channel queue and 
               
               
                   
                 allowing prioritization by incoming channel. Single point management with proactive 
               
               
                   
                 monitoring. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s contact transition technology? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No use of Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) technologies. Customer 
               
               
                   
                 information is not transferred to the agent desktop 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Limited use of CTI or IVR technologies enables basic customer information to be 
               
               
                   
                 transferred to the agent desktop. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A holistic customer view is created from CTI/IVR information capture and is 
               
               
                   
                 combined with account information, contact history, and prioritized contextual  
               
               
                   
                 workflow choices to meet customer need. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your firm&#39;s application management practices for 
               
               
                   
                 live agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Multiple applications on a desk top without a standardized application format. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Agent applications are organized in an optimal manner while trying to reduce the 
               
               
                   
                 number of clicks required for navigation. Data entry and navigation within the 
               
               
                   
                 applications is a manual process. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Automated call assistant, utilizing speech recognition, provides agent application 
               
               
                   
                 navigation, customer data capture and workflow completion. 
               
               
                 Voice of the 
                 At what organizational levels does your company measure transactional customer 
               
               
                 Customer 
                 satisfaction? 
               
               
                 Integration 
                 1 - Transactional customer satisfaction is not measured at any organization level. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Transactional customer satisfaction is measured at the enterprise level but 
               
               
                   
                 excludes measurement at the team and agent level. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Transactional customer satisfaction is measured at the enterprise, team, and agent 
               
               
                   
                 level. 
               
               
                   
                 Who in your organization has accountability for customer satisfaction (CSAT) targets? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No assigned accountability for CSAT target achievement. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Contact center management has accountability for CSAT target achievement. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Contact center team managers and agents have primary accountability for target 
               
               
                   
                 achievement. 
               
               
                 Survey 
                 Which statement best describes the use of a statistically significant sample size when 
               
               
                 Sampling 
                 collecting and measuring customer satisfaction information? 
               
               
                 Method- 
                 1 - Statistically valid sample size is not used. 
               
               
                 ology 
                 3 - Statistically valid sample size is collected for the entire center (95% confidence 
               
               
                   
                 level with +/−5% error range). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Statistically valid sample size is collected for the entire center, as well as at the 
               
               
                   
                 team or agent level (usually represents a minimum of 5 per agent per time period and 7 
               
               
                   
                 per team manager per time period). 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree are customer groups and segments represented in customer 
               
               
                   
                 satisfaction sampling for statistical purposes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Not all customer groups and segments are adequately represented in sampling. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - All customer groups are adequately represented in sampling, but there is 
               
               
                   
                 insufficient data for analyzing every customer segment. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - All customer groups are adequately represented in sampling, with a sufficient 
               
               
                   
                 sample size for analyzing all customer segments. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree are call types and individual interaction channels represented in 
               
               
                   
                 customer satisfaction sampling for statistical purposes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Sampling scheme is not representative of a mix of call types or interaction channels 
               
               
                   
                 (Live Agent, IVR, email, and Web contacts). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Sampling scheme is representative of a mix of call types and interaction channels. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Sampling scheme is representative of each call type and, interaction channel (Live 
               
               
                   
                 Agent, IVR, email, and Web). Increased quotas (desired # of samples) are sometimes 
               
               
                   
                 used to get more insight into known trouble spots. 
               
               
                 Questionnaire 
                 What mix, if any, of qualitative and/or quantitative methods are used to collect survey 
               
               
                 Design 
                 response data? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Qualitative survey information is gathered (i.e. free-form text comments). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Quantitative survey information is gathered (i.e. ratings on a scale of 1 to 10). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Quantitative and qualitative survey information is gathered. Transactional quality 
               
               
                   
                 and other service aspects (i.e. hold time, resolution) are usually included. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the focus of the content within customer 
               
               
                   
                 satisfaction surveys? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Survey content is solely focused on the most recent contact experience. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Survey content is focused on the most recent and historical contact experiences. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Survey content is focused on items that can be operationalized, the most recent 
               
               
                   
                 and historical contact experiences. 
               
               
                 Voice of the 
                 Which best describes how customer satisfaction information is reported? 
               
               
                 Customer 
                 1 - Customer satisfaction information is only reported at the end of a predefined data 
               
               
                 Reporting 
                 collection period (i.e. quarterly batch feed). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer satisfaction information can be reported on a frequent predefined basis 
               
               
                   
                 (i.e. batch feed) as well as when needed, but does not display real-time survey 
               
               
                   
                 response data. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer satisfaction information is reported through a customizable reporting 
               
               
                   
                 mechanism and can display real-time survey response data, which is integrated into 
               
               
                   
                 dashboards. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your organization&#39;s dissatisfied customer alert processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No alert processes exist to flag dissatisfied customers. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Dissatisfied customer alerts are provided to the contact center within 24-48 hours of 
               
               
                   
                 the response, with no formal process for tracking alert follow-ups, escalations, 
               
               
                   
                 callbacks. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Dissatisfied customer alerts are provided to the contact center within 24-48 hours of 
               
               
                   
                 the response with a formalized process for tracking alert follow-ups, escalations, and 
               
               
                   
                 callbacks. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent is there access to raw customer satisfaction data? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No ability to access raw customer satisfaction data (individual survey responses). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Raw customer satisfaction data (individual survey responses) is received 
               
               
                   
                 periodically. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Raw customer satisfaction data (individual survey responses) is accessible through 
               
               
                   
                 a real-time dashboard for the most current information and querying purposes. 
               
               
                 Data 
                 Which of the following best describes how customer satisfaction data is generally 
               
               
                 Integration 
                 analyzed? 
               
               
                 and Linkage 
                 1 - Limited trending and/or comparative analysis is conducted on customer satisfaction 
               
               
                 Analysis 
                 data. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Statistical correlation and/or key driver analysis is conducted on customer 
               
               
                   
                 satisfaction data to identify important customer behaviors. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Statistical correlation analysis is conducted to link customer satisfaction data to 
               
               
                   
                 other interaction information such as AHT, service levels, quality audits and employee 
               
               
                   
                 satisfaction. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your firm link customer satisfaction data to other metrics? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer satisfaction data is not linked to other metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer satisfaction data is usually linked to agent-based metrics (i.e. tenure or 
               
               
                   
                 training time). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Contact center satisfaction data is usually linked the impacts of customer loyalty 
               
               
                   
                 such as churn or customer lifetime value metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree are the root causes of customer satisfaction fluctuations understood? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No analysis is performed to understand the root causes of customer satisfaction 
               
               
                   
                 fluctuations. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The root causes of customer satisfaction fluctuations are analyzed through 
               
               
                   
                 correlation to interaction processes and metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The root causes of customer satisfaction fluctuations are analyzed through 
               
               
                   
                 correlation to interaction processes and metrics, as well as other customer and 
               
               
                   
                 business processes throughout the organization. 
               
               
                 Voice of the 
                 How is customer satisfaction data used to improve customer interaction processes? 
               
               
                 Customer 
                 1 - Customer satisfaction data is either occasionally or not used to improve customer 
               
               
                 Process 
                 interaction processes. 
               
               
                 Alignment 
                 3 - Customer satisfaction data is primarily used to improve customer interaction 
               
               
                   
                 processes, but is usually not part of a formalized process improvement methodology. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer satisfaction data is used to improve customer interaction processes, and 
               
               
                   
                 is an integral part of a formalized process improvement methodology (i.e. Six Sigma). 
               
               
                 Quality 
                 How is call monitoring conducted within your organization? 
               
               
                 Monitoring 
                 1 - All monitoring is conducted remotely. 
               
               
                 Process 
                 3 - Most monitoring is conducted remotely with little use of side-by-side monitoring. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Advanced speech recognition is used to monitor the majority of calls, with live, side- 
               
               
                   
                 by-side monitoring for calls that meet specific criteria. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your firm determine the number of times an agent is monitored for quality 
               
               
                   
                 over a given period of time? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Set number of monitoring sessions over a specific time period (ex: 4 times per agent 
               
               
                   
                 per month). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Number of monitoring sessions is determined by previous agent performance (ex: 
               
               
                   
                 agent-focused monitoring). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Number of monitoring sessions is determined by previous agent performance (i.e. 
               
               
                   
                 agent-focused monitoring) and by most frequent customer issues (issue-focused 
               
               
                   
                 monitoring). 
               
               
                   
                 Who performs the Quality Monitoring? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Monitoring is usually only performed by a quality evaluator. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Monitoring is conducted by quality evaluators as well as immediate supervisors. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Monitoring is conducted by quality evaluators, immediate supervisors, and subject 
               
               
                   
                 matter experts. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe the quality monitoring process your firm uses? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Random generation of calls to monitor and then monitoring a variable number of 
               
               
                   
                 calls. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Random generation of calls to monitor, and then monitoring a statistically valid 
               
               
                   
                 number of calls. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Monitoring a statistically valid number of, calls, as well as exception-based 
               
               
                   
                 monitoring only on under-performing agents identified through previous advanced 
               
               
                   
                 speech recognition monitoring. 
               
               
                   
                 What type of call quality monitoring tools if any, does your organization employ? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Lack of systematic call quality monitoring tools. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Automated system that records calls for post-call monitoring purposes, feedback to 
               
               
                   
                 agents, and access to raw data. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Automated system call recordings are tied with dashboard reports that enable 
               
               
                   
                 employees to view evaluations and dispute scores. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your firm perform calibration sessions and ensure consistency 
               
               
                   
                 across the quality monitoring process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Regular calibration sessions occur among quality monitors to ensure scoring 
               
               
                   
                 consistency. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Calibration sessions occur between and across sites to ensure scoring consistency. 
               
               
                   
                 Variance targets are established, monitored, reported and actively managed. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A calibration program is established with owners among management and agents. 
               
               
                   
                 Agents assess their own performance and calibrate against a quality evaluator&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 scoring to continuously refine quality standards. 
               
               
                 Quality 
                 How are quality targets used to drive continuous improvement? 
               
               
                 Feedback 
                 1 - Quality score targets are not used to drive continuous improvement. 
               
               
                 Process 
                 3 - Quality score targets are tied to key performance drivers with no formal continuous 
               
               
                   
                 improvement modification process. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Quality score targets are set through analysis of key performance drivers and have 
               
               
                   
                 a formal continuous improvement modification process. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how quality targets are reported? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Quality target achievement is not reported via agent scorecards or formal reports. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Quality target achievement is reported via agent scorecards and is included in 
               
               
                   
                 performance management processes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Quality target achievement, call recordings, and other agent performance metrics 
               
               
                   
                 are integrated into, a dashboard. 
               
               
                   
                 Who is accountable for customer experience quality target achievements? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Site management has accountability for target achievement. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Site management and team leads have accountability for target achievement. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Site management, team leads, and agents have accountability for target 
               
               
                   
                 achievement. 
               
               
                   
                 Who is responsible for providing quality score feedback to agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Quality monitoring personnel (non-managerial) are responsible for providing quality 
               
               
                   
                 score feedback to agents. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Team managers are responsible for providing quality score feedback to agents. 
               
               
                   
                 Critical issues have a feedback loop of less than 24 hours. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Team managers are responsible for providing quality score feedback to agents with 
               
               
                   
                 some automated quality score coaching in place. Critical issues have an immediate 
               
               
                   
                 feedback loop. 
               
               
                   
                 How consistent is feedback and coaching around quality scores? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Little or no consistency in the feedback or coaching around quality scores. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Informal feedback and coaching exists around quality scores. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Quality feedback &amp; coaching around quality scores is consistent. 
               
               
                   
                 What level of analysis is performed on call quality? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Agent and program level trends analysis is performed. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Agent and program level trends analysis is combined with quality metric trends 
               
               
                   
                 reports. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Agent and program level trends analysis, quality metric trends reports, and agent 
               
               
                   
                 scorecard performance trends are performed and correlated to quality feedback. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your firm integrate quality monitoring into training processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Monitoring call quality is not used to refine training content. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Monitoring call quality is used to refine training content. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Monitoring call quality is used to refine training content and recorded calls are used 
               
               
                   
                 by the training team in the process of, training new hires. 
               
               
                 Quality 
                 What elements are incorporated into your organization&#39;s quality monitoring forms? 
               
               
                 Monitoring 
                 1 - Quality monitoring forms have metrics that are solely based on standardized 
               
               
                 Metrics 
                 processes. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Quality monitoring forms include metrics that are based on,standardized processes 
               
               
                   
                 as well as several customer-focused (soft skills) elements. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Quality monitoring forms include metrics that are based on standardized processes 
               
               
                   
                 that drive operational efficiency, along with appropriate customer-focused elements that 
               
               
                   
                 drive customer satisfaction. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization identify and develop quality monitoring metrics? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No statistical or methodical means to identify the right quality metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Metrics have been intuitively developed to understand key drivers. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Metrics are derived from statistical models that have been developed to understand 
               
               
                   
                 key drivers. 
               
               
                   
                 How is analysis used, if any, to determine the validity of quality metrics? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The validity of quality metrics is not analyzed or assessed. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The validity of quality metrics is infrequently analyzed or assessed. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The validity of quality metrics is frequently analyzed and assessed. 
               
               
                   
                 How are weights assigned to quality monitoring metrics? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No quality metric weighting system is in place 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Equal weights are assigned to metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Correlations to KPIs and the overall objectives of the program drives the assignment 
               
               
                   
                 of weights to metrics. 
               
               
                   
                 How are quality monitoring metrics used? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Quality is measured and used only for coaching agents. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Quality is measured and used for coaching agents, and used as a key performance 
               
               
                   
                 indicator (KPI). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Quality is measured, used for coaching agents, and used as an enabler to 
               
               
                   
                 understand and develop other key performance indicators (KPIs). 
               
               
                   
                 How is data from quality metrics used to understand other metrics and KPIs across the 
               
               
                   
                 call center? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Quality metrics data is not used to understand other metrics across the call center. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Quality metrics data is used as an attempt to improve customer service but is not 
               
               
                   
                 formally linked to important KPIs such as customer satisfaction and operational 
               
               
                   
                 efficiencies. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Quality metrics data is used to diagnose the drivers of other KPIs based on a 
               
               
                   
                 correlation of the quality content to those KPIs. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                 TABLE 11 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Exemplary organization of questions and exemplars associated with attributes and capabilities of a 
               
               
                 care infrastructure domain 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Technology 
                 Which of the following best describes the extent that your current and future 
               
               
                 Strategy 
                 technology operating environment is defined? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The current operating environment is not documented and future environment 
               
               
                   
                 may be discussed in general terms. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The current and future operating environments are expressed in terms of 
               
               
                   
                 Information Technology (IT) performance characteristics (e.g. availability, response 
               
               
                   
                 time, defect rate) with timelines to achieve. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Current and future operating environments are defined by IT in collaboration 
               
               
                   
                 with all business units. Operating environments are defined within a roadmap which 
               
               
                   
                 documents capabilities, expectations, and detailed steps with Timeline milestones. 
               
               
                   
                 Any refinements to roadmap involves enterprise-wide effort with alignment across 
               
               
                   
                 organizations and business objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 How are technology investments prioritized on your organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is little evidence of systematic technology investment prioritization. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Prioritization is based on speed and ability of meeting business objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The business needs fully drive prioritization on dimensions of precision, cost, 
               
               
                   
                 speed, agility, consistency, and competitive advantage. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree is your architecture defined? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There are generalized architecture descriptions for functional applications. 
               
               
                   
                 Could be characterized as an environment with many “rogue” architecture 
               
               
                   
                 components. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Enterprise-wide architecture requirements of hardware and software capabilities 
               
               
                   
                 and needs are detailed and include areas of security and performance monitoring. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Architecture is defined in terms of integration maturity with organizations across 
               
               
                   
                 the enterprise covering security, data management, service layers, and 
               
               
                   
                 internal/external SLA performance monitoring. 
               
               
                   
                 Thinking about the software applications that enable customer care operations, 
               
               
                   
                 which of the following best describes your company&#39;s application strategy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Applications often are narrowly developed to address specific business needs. 
               
               
                   
                 Application strategy is often more tactical and greatly is influenced by new 
               
               
                   
                 applications acquired through mergers and/or desire to move to a singular core 
               
               
                   
                 application. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Highly customized applications exist to meet the needs of business processes. 
               
               
                   
                 Application strategy is based on meeting process demands and integration across 
               
               
                   
                 enterprise. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - COTS (Commercial Off The Shelf) focused technology strategy is centered on 
               
               
                   
                 vendor partnerships, scalability and integration capabilities in alignment to overall 
               
               
                   
                 business strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your organization include costs in your technology strategy 
               
               
                   
                 and roadmapping? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Costs of Information Technology (IT) infrastructure are not included within the 
               
               
                   
                 technology roadmap, and/or only the retirement of large applications are included 
               
               
                   
                 as they relate to new buying decisions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - IT infrastructure costs are detailed and include maintenance requirements. New 
               
               
                   
                 buying decisions are linked primarily to costs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - IT infrastructure costs are detailed and aligned to buying decisions, which meet 
               
               
                   
                 strategic business objectives. Ongoing maintenance, application consolidation and 
               
               
                   
                 retirement are integral to the cost analysis. 
               
               
                 Alignment 
                 Which of the following best describes the extent to which the roles and priorities of 
               
               
                 with 
                 Information Technology (IT) are defined? 
               
               
                 Business 
                 1 - There is minimal definition, development, and understanding of IT roles and 
               
               
                 Strategy 
                 responsibilities at leadership level or worker level. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Leadership has formalized an IT role and has collaborated on priorities in light of 
               
               
                   
                 business objectives, however little understanding is communicated throughout the 
               
               
                   
                 organization. IT leadership may understand their tie to business strategy, but 
               
               
                   
                 everyone in the organization may not. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Executives have formal agreement about the short and long term roles and 
               
               
                   
                 priorities of IT including potential outsourcing solutions. Expectations are 
               
               
                   
                 communicated throughout the organization. Everyone in IT understands their role 
               
               
                   
                 in the strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your Information Technology (IT) division partner with other 
               
               
                   
                 business units? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - IT department&#39;s agenda and objectives are defined and dictated by the business 
               
               
                   
                 units. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - IT leadership and the business leadership have effective formal and informal 
               
               
                   
                 working relationships that seek to meet business goals. Alignment is evaluated and 
               
               
                   
                 refined in regular cycles. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - IT has strong partnership with business functions following parallel paths 
               
               
                   
                 towards the same objectives. Alignment is continually reevaluated as business 
               
               
                   
                 directions change and/or operational pace accelerates. 
               
               
                   
                 What criteria are utilized to make IT spending decisions? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - IT spending decisions are made primarily on the basis of cost or functionality 
               
               
                   
                 with little or no business input. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - IT spending decisions are made on a balanced evaluation of requirements and 
               
               
                   
                 cost with business representation only on largest and/or most complex projects. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - IT spending decisions are made using a synergistic model where business 
               
               
                   
                 drives IT evaluation of functional requirements while IT balances with architectural 
               
               
                   
                 and scalability requirements. Shared decision making based on value contribution, 
               
               
                   
                 ROI and strategy alignment. 
               
               
                   
                 How flexible is your application strategy to business process changes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Application strategy is inflexible to business process changes. The processes 
               
               
                   
                 are frequently modified to meet application constraints rather than incur additional 
               
               
                   
                 development costs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Application strategy has limited flexibility to meet business process changes with 
               
               
                   
                 mid to heavy dependence on development and customization via cyclic, integrated 
               
               
                   
                 software releases. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Application strategy drives inherent flexibility at architecture and configuration 
               
               
                   
                 level allowing dot code releases to support iterative process changes. 
               
               
                   
                 Who is accountable for IT production metrics? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - IT management is held accountable for functional level IT production metrics 
               
               
                   
                 (e.g. availability, system defect rates). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - IT management has a functional scorecard comprised of development (e.g. 
               
               
                   
                 requirements map to business functionality, test defects) and production metrics 
               
               
                   
                 that align with business strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Business and IT have shared scorecards propagated down to individual 
               
               
                   
                 contributor level that is driven by evaluation of performance against business 
               
               
                   
                 initiatives overall. 
               
               
                 Human 
                 Where is the primary focus of your company&#39;s human factors engineering efforts? 
               
               
                 Factors 
                 1 - Focus on functionality. 
               
               
                 Engineering 
                 3 - Focus on usability. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Focus on human performance metrics (fatigue, cognitive load and perceptual 
               
               
                   
                 limits). 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your company&#39;s philosophy towards human factors 
               
               
                   
                 engineering? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is an expectation that people will adapt to technology. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The company places emphasis on tailoring the design of technology to human 
               
               
                   
                 ease of use. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The company places emphasis on tailoring the design of technology to human 
               
               
                   
                 needs, limitations, mental models, and cognitive and perceptual styles. 
               
               
                   
                 What knowledge sources does your company rely on for human factors 
               
               
                   
                 engineering? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Reliance on intuition and common sense reasoning, lack of understanding of 
               
               
                   
                 human behavior. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Reliance on logic and educated guesses, use of theoretical techniques to 
               
               
                   
                 understand human behavior. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Reliance on research from peer-reviewed scientific studies and use of empirical 
               
               
                   
                 techniques to study and understand human behavior to determine user 
               
               
                   
                 requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 What type of testing methods are used in human factors engineering in your 
               
               
                   
                 company? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No formal testing methodology. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Lab-based interaction testing, artificial environment testing. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Rigorous scientific and analytical methods in lab testing, task analysis, field 
               
               
                   
                 studies and direct observation. 
               
               
                 Business 
                 To what degree is business continuity planning (how an organization will recover 
               
               
                 Continuity 
                 from a disaster) viewed as important to your company? 
               
               
                 Planning 
                 1 - Business Continuity is not viewed as a corporate competence. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Critical functions form business continuity pockets of excellence. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Business Continuity processes integrated in the corporate culture, as part of a 
               
               
                   
                 business as usual routine. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree is your company&#39;s leadership involved in business continuity 
               
               
                   
                 planning and support? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is a decentralized focus relying on individual efforts, with little or no senior 
               
               
                   
                 management support. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There is Leadership commitment with basic set standards, and centralized 
               
               
                   
                 support for the rest of the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Leadership is directly involved, including the commitment to enforceable policy 
               
               
                   
                 and participation in training. Business Units are involved in periodic crisis exercises 
               
               
                   
                 and evaluated on rehearsals. Continuous improvement initiatives are in place to 
               
               
                   
                 improve the continuity plan. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your organization define and update analysis of potential 
               
               
                   
                 emergencies and critical events? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Potential emergencies, disasters, and critical events are poorly defined and 
               
               
                   
                 rarely researched or updated. Inventory of risks, mission-critical human resources, 
               
               
                   
                 and assessments of exposure are updated after events occur. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Potential emergencies, disasters, and critical events are somewhat defined and 
               
               
                   
                 occasionally researched and updated. Inventory of risks, mission-critical human 
               
               
                   
                 resources, and assessments of exposure are updated occasionally when risk is 
               
               
                   
                 imminent. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Rigorous and thorough definitions of potential emergencies, disasters, and 
               
               
                   
                 critical events researched and updated. Thorough inventory of risks, mission-critical 
               
               
                   
                 human resources, and assessments of exposure, are updated on an ongoing, 
               
               
                   
                 formal basis. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the depth/detail of your organization&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 business continuity plans? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Mitigation plans are random efforts to lessen the mostly internal short-term risks 
               
               
                   
                 that emergencies, disasters, and critical events may have on workforce and 
               
               
                   
                 business operations. (e.g., 1 centrally located Contact Center). Agents are highly- 
               
               
                   
                 specialized and not cross-trained. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Mitigation plans are intermittent efforts to lessen the mostly internal/external 
               
               
                   
                 mid-term risks that emergencies, disasters, and critical events may have on 
               
               
                   
                 workforce and business operations. (e.g., 2 or more geographically independent 
               
               
                   
                 Contact Centers. Loosely defined cross-training methodology) 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Mitigation plans are ongoing, ranked, and prioritized efforts to reduce or prevent 
               
               
                   
                 internal/external long &amp; short-term risks that emergencies, disasters, and critical 
               
               
                   
                 events may have on workforce and business operations. (e.g., multiple redundant 
               
               
                   
                 contact centers). Cross-training curriculum is standard and aligned with mitigation 
               
               
                   
                 plan 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the degree to which business 
               
               
                   
                 partners/vendors are incorporated into your company&#39;s business continuity plans? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Human and supply chain issues generally not included in plans. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Human impact issues and/or supply chain consequences limited to most critical 
               
               
                   
                 processes and small number of vendors. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Coordination of business continuity issues and requirements with, employees, 
               
               
                   
                 customers&#39;and vendors ensuring that critical supply chain partners have their own 
               
               
                   
                 adequate business continuity plans in place. 
               
               
                 Application 
                 Which statement best describes the organization&#39;s vision and approach to 
               
               
                 Design 
                 application design? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The vision is simply the ability to answer and be responsive to the customer at 
               
               
                   
                 the most basic levels. Applications and data are not integrated to identify the 
               
               
                   
                 customer prior to contact delivery to agent. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The vision is to produce repeatable (and positive) customer experiences, 
               
               
                   
                 leveraging some data and application integration on agent desktop. At a minimum, 
               
               
                   
                 the customer is identified prior to contact delivery to the agent through use of 
               
               
                   
                 Compute Telephony Integration (CTI). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The vision is to provide proactive and collaborative customer support through 
               
               
                   
                 the applications. Context is extracted and leveraged/integrated across multiple 
               
               
                   
                 interaction channels to enable personalized, situation specific experience. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the extent to which your company&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 applications automatically filter or link to additional supporting customer data like 
               
               
                   
                 purchase history or customer tier level? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Agents have to make manual association of customer to products and services 
               
               
                   
                 based on customer profile and agent skill set. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The system performs a rudimentary systematic association of customer to 
               
               
                   
                 products and services data which is performed by online scripting of established 
               
               
                   
                 policies. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The system has the ability to dynamically anticipate and provide customer 
               
               
                   
                 service data in real time across channels with focus on personalized decision 
               
               
                   
                 support through advanced knowledge management and predictive analytics. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes self-service (ex: web support) capabilities 
               
               
                   
                 available to your customers? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Self-Care functionality addresses Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) at a 
               
               
                   
                 generic level but does not support online transactions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Self-Care systems support resolution of the most common issues (ex: account 
               
               
                   
                 updates and billing) , but do not integrate information to source applications 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Fully integrated Self-Care applications which support consumer inquiries with 
               
               
                   
                 real-time resolutions and integrates data across applications. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes how “user friendly” or “usable” your 
               
               
                   
                 company&#39;s applications are? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Applications are not intuitive or efficient. Multiple applications require a multitude 
               
               
                   
                 of desktop views and navigation steps. Extensive training is required to enable 
               
               
                   
                 agents to use applications. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Use of a single application has some intuitive components but multiple screens 
               
               
                   
                 and navigation steps are required. Less training time is required. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Single fully integrated application on agent desktop that provides intuitive 
               
               
                   
                 navigation and minimizes the number of navigation steps. Agents can ramp quickly 
               
               
                   
                 and take advantage of a mild learning curve. 
               
               
                   
                 How flexible is your application architecture to adapt to business process changes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Application(s) are inflexible to business process changes. Processes frequently 
               
               
                   
                 modified to meet application constraints rather an incur additional development 
               
               
                   
                 costs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Application(s) have some flexibility to adapt to business processes but are 
               
               
                   
                 dependant on customized development via regular software releases. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Application(s) are built with an inherently flexible at architecture and 
               
               
                   
                 configuration levels allowing dot code releases to support iterative process 
               
               
                   
                 changes. New workflows can be quickly incorporated into the application. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree are your company applications designed to produce usable data 
               
               
                   
                 that can be stored in, a data warehouse and reported against? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Applications are designed to produce rudimentary data on trending, forecasting 
               
               
                   
                 and fulfillment reporting is available from source systems (not data warehoused) 
               
               
                   
                 Users of the data are typically at functional levels. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Applications are designed to provide moderate data warehouse capabilities 
               
               
                   
                 enable quantitative, historical analysis correlated across functional applications. 
               
               
                   
                 Users of the data are usually at management levels and above. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Applications are designed to feed an Integrated data warehouse allows 
               
               
                   
                 enterprise-wide view of customer to enable real-time analysis at all user desktops. 
               
               
                   
                 Users of the data are at all levels of the organization. 
               
               
                 Integrated 
                 To what extent does your organization use historical transaction data to provide an 
               
               
                 View of 
                 integrated view of the customer? 
               
               
                 Customer 
                 1 - Agents have no visibility to historical customer transactions during customer 
               
               
                   
                 interaction. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Agents have limited visibility to historical customer transactions during customer 
               
               
                   
                 interaction. The agent often interacts with the customer based on their discretion. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Agents have full visibility to historical customer transaction data plus real time 
               
               
                   
                 data and the tool typically drives the interaction with the customer based on 
               
               
                   
                 meeting certain profiles. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s data storage and data 
               
               
                   
                 usability situation? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Customer data is stored in different data stores with functional (e.g. sales, 
               
               
                   
                 service, billing) ability to view, report and perform analysis across platforms. 
               
               
                   
                 Specialized data users needed to perform manual analyses. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Customer data (that comes from different sources) is stored in data warehouse 
               
               
                   
                 that provides the capability to answer specific business problems and create a 
               
               
                   
                 historical customer views for specialized users via front end tools and queries. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer data (that comes from different sources) is stored in a full data 
               
               
                   
                 warehousing solution that allows all customer-facing users the ability to view and 
               
               
                   
                 manipulate customer, product and contact channel data real-time, at point of need. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your company&#39;s Customer Relationship 
               
               
                   
                 Management (CRM) capabilities? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Rudimentary CRM system which is primarily focused on service and sales 
               
               
                   
                 support. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Mature CRM system which enables integration of critical customer interaction 
               
               
                   
                 channels (e.g. voice, email, internet, on-site). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Mature CRM system which enables seamless integration of all interaction 
               
               
                   
                 channels via robust CRM solution for unified view of sales, marketing service, and 
               
               
                   
                 billing interactions with customer. 
               
               
                   
                 How well does your company&#39;s application infrastructure support an integrated view 
               
               
                   
                 of the customer? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Multiple applications for each functional area are needed to understand 
               
               
                   
                 customer interaction and, history. Little or no ability to provide a holistic customer 
               
               
                   
                 view. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Integrated applications create cohesive view of customer within each functional 
               
               
                   
                 area. Multiple applications needed for holistic customer view. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Applications provide a singular customer view across functional areas through 
               
               
                   
                 highly integrated, enterprise wide application and data transparency strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the information available to agents though 
               
               
                   
                 applications while servicing customers? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Agent have access to account history and, product catalog to enable 
               
               
                   
                 unstructured individually (agent) biased positioning and messaging. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Agent have access to standardized scripting and customer treatment options 
               
               
                   
                 based on historical data functional area and a few elements of the customer profile. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Agent have access to highly integrated and contextually driven data from across 
               
               
                   
                 all interaction channels enabling personalized scripting, positioning and overall 
               
               
                   
                 messaging. 
               
               
                 Analytic 
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s knowledge repository? 
               
               
                 Decisioning 
                 1 - No knowledge repository or knowledge base is present other than physical 
               
               
                   
                 documents and paper manuals. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Knowledge repository contains standardized documents available, indexed and 
               
               
                   
                 cataloged in centralized data store but requires varying navigation to access. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Knowledge repository is easily accessible (typically via flexible “context” 
               
               
                   
                 inquiries) and information is proactively presented to poeple at the point of need 
               
               
                   
                 Describe the degree to which your company&#39;s application technology automatically 
               
               
                   
                 presents information to help agents make decisions? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Little or no technology assisted discussion or decision assistance is deployed. 
               
               
                   
                 Decisioning is primarily dependant on the agent&#39;s skill set and training. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some applications have technology assisted decisioning through qualification 
               
               
                   
                 criteria for products and services that agents uses to make decisions. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Applications have fully Integrated technology assisted decisioning assistance 
               
               
                   
                 which automates routine and low-value decisions while proposing decision choices 
               
               
                   
                 for more complex decisions 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are your business processes embedded within application 
               
               
                   
                 workflows? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Minimal or no business process workflows are imbedded within application. 
               
               
                   
                 Applications focus on data capture. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Critical business processes are embedded within application workflows. 
               
               
                   
                 Applications focus on process entrance/exit criteria and data validation. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - All applicable business process are embedded in application workflows. 
               
               
                   
                 Applications focus on customer transaction record quality. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the feedback on the performance of your 
               
               
                   
                 decisioning analysis tools? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is minimal or infrequent feedback on the performance of the decisioning 
               
               
                   
                 tools. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There is frequent feedback on historical analysis tools employed to assess and 
               
               
                   
                 improve agent skill sets focused on speed, precision and cost. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is frequent real-time analysis tool feedback on precision, speed, agility, 
               
               
                   
                 cost and consistency dimensions 
               
               
                 Business 
                 Which statement best describes the repository for your company&#39;s business rules? 
               
               
                 Rules 
                 1 - Business rules and metrics are maintained in requirements documents and are 
               
               
                 Management 
                 defined at the business user level. 
               
               
                 Systems 
                 3 - A common Meta Data repository is used by IT for requirements tracking but has 
               
               
                   
                 yet to be widely accepted as a common repository for the enterprise. Typically IT 
               
               
                   
                 only has access and Business rules cannot be changed on the fly. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A common Business Rules Management System (BRMS) repository whereby 
               
               
                   
                 users can check or change rules directly without IT involvement. Is widely accepted 
               
               
                   
                 as a common repository for the enterprise. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the interface used to access business rules? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Business logic is hard-wired into applications and/or the “interface” is through 
               
               
                   
                 requirements documents and implementation of those requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Business rules are defined in ETL or Metadata tools which support or the 
               
               
                   
                 integration and processing of backend data. Updates of rules for reference 
               
               
                   
                 available to the developers and not the business users. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - IT applications are represented through a natural language interface to design 
               
               
                   
                 or edit decision table(s) and or tree(s). 
               
               
                   
                 Where is business logic maintained? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Business logic is implemented redundantly into multiple applications. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Business logic is maintained in stored procedures and checked into versioning 
               
               
                   
                 software. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Business logic is externalized and is housed within the Service Oriented 
               
               
                   
                 Architecture (SOA) for access by multiple applications for reusability. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent do your business rules support modeling? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No integration of business rules to data modeling. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Business rules are checked into a common repository but no direct mapping to 
               
               
                   
                 the data and/or process model exists. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Supports business process modeling and mapping of flows and controls tied to 
               
               
                   
                 the data model. 
               
               
                 Service 
                 To what extent are your organization&#39;s core IT services defined? 
               
               
                 Oriented 
                 1 - Core IT services are not be defined. Services are provided as requested. 
               
               
                 Architecture 
                 3 - Core IT services are defined throughout disparate silos and provides tactical 
               
               
                   
                 support. Core services are not integrated into a single Service Oriented 
               
               
                   
                 Architecture (SOA). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Core IT services are clearly defined, aligned with business objectives and 
               
               
                   
                 integrated into a single SOA. Services are iterative and tied to ROI analysis. 
               
               
                   
                 Supporting technology for core services is in direct alignment to business strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your architecture&#39;s level of data integration? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Architecture supports only specific data needs for individualized use via access 
               
               
                   
                 to disparate systems. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Architecture supports partial data integration. Integration opportunities are 
               
               
                   
                 driven by unique business unit needs. Architecture lends itself to batch data 
               
               
                   
                 inquiries. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Architecture supports discrete functions which are contained in interoperable, 
               
               
                   
                 standards-based applications that provides data federation in REAL TIME. Data is 
               
               
                   
                 encapsulated for reuse, and is extensible and flexible to maintain. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the type of review the business rules and metrics 
               
               
                   
                 (that impact the architecture) undergo on a routine basis? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Business rules and metrics are maintained on an “as needed” in requirements 
               
               
                   
                 documents and are defined at the business user level. Many definitions exist 
               
               
                   
                 across the enterprise and result in inconsistent data reporting results. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Business rules and metrics are maintained in a tool that is owned by IT but 
               
               
                   
                 review and updating is typically infrequent. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Business rules and metrics are reviewed in a regular, frequent schedule and 
               
               
                   
                 are governed by a governance board insuring accuracy across the organization, 
               
               
                   
                 eliminating duplication, inconsistent reporting and management of data capture. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the flexibility of your architecture&#39;s reporting 
               
               
                   
                 abilities? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Reporting is difficult to adapt to a changing environment as report changes 
               
               
                   
                 always require formal change requests and extensive re-design to the back end 
               
               
                   
                 system(s). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Reporting is facilitated because transformation and data integration is done at 
               
               
                   
                 the application and/or report level and is built within the reports which can be 
               
               
                   
                 reused rather than a back end architecture. Static, dynamic and ad-hoc reporting 
               
               
                   
                 is supported. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Reporting is flexible application placed on top of the back end architecture and 
               
               
                   
                 includes collaborative filtering, real time decision analytics, and trend identification 
               
               
                   
                 through static, dynamic, and ad-hoc reporting. 
               
               
                 External 
                 What programs or processes, if any, does your organization use to define external 
               
               
                 Network 
                 network requirements? 
               
               
                 (Customer 
                 1 - Ad hoc process for evaluating external network requirements based on user 
               
               
                 Facing) 
                 requests. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Program defines itself based on frequency of customer implementations. Need 
               
               
                   
                 defines the program. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Defined program for iteratively evaluating external network requirements and 
               
               
                   
                 ability to deliver on those needs. 
               
               
                   
                 Thinking about customer facing network functionality, what degree of internal 
               
               
                   
                 collaboration does your organization employ to collect and address user 
               
               
                   
                 requirements? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Individual business units market and deploy their own functionality to meet user 
               
               
                   
                 requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Collaboration between business units occurs but is driven by poor user 
               
               
                   
                 response to multiple functionality that is reactive in nature. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Collaborative effort to define user requirements prior to marketing and 
               
               
                   
                 deployment of functionality to deliver holistic solutions to customers. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization evaluate whether the existing technology architecture 
               
               
                   
                 is meeting external (customer facing) network requirements? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Existing technology architectural is not evaluated in its ability to meet external 
               
               
                   
                 (customer facing) network requirements, and often does not meet 100% of needs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Existing technology architecture is evaluated against external (customer facing) 
               
               
                   
                 network requirements but only in areas with high revenue impacts and high value 
               
               
                   
                 customers. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Existing technology architecture is continually evaluated against all external 
               
               
                   
                 (customer facing) requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 How comprehensive are the external network solutions that are created for 
               
               
                   
                 customers? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Solutions contain core services/functionality that can only handle a subset of 
               
               
                   
                 specific customer requests. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Solutions contain segmented services/functionality based on most commonly 
               
               
                   
                 requested normal business processes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Solutions contain a full suite of services/functionality with inclusion of security, 
               
               
                   
                 compatibility and interoperability considerations. 
               
               
                   
                 Please describe your organization&#39;s primary architecture utilized for electronic 
               
               
                   
                 interaction with customers? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - File Transfer Protocol is the primary architecture utilized to interact with 
               
               
                   
                 customers. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Web structure with portals provides additional functionality with expansion 
               
               
                   
                 capabilities along a defined architectural and technological roadmap. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Established Application Program Interface (API) with a detailed specification that 
               
               
                   
                 can be shared with customers and standardized architecture that allows connection 
               
               
                   
                 through the API. 
               
               
                 Network 
                 Which best describes describe your organization&#39;s network data and 
               
               
                 Convergence 
                 communication platforrn(s)? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Multiple platforms for data and voice with limited management and monitoring 
               
               
                   
                 capabilities. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Separate platforms for data and voice, PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE 
               
               
                   
                 NETWORK (PSTN) and packet switching with multiple point management systems. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Integrated IP network platform with tunneling protocol which supports voice, 
               
               
                   
                 data, video and fax converged over a single platform and single network with a 
               
               
                   
                 single management and monitoring interface. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your call routing capabilities? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Calls can be routed to multiple queues, with separate queues for each skill set. 
               
               
                   
                 Contacts can not be swapped from one queue to another to alleviate backups, 
               
               
                   
                 processes drive routing decisions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Calls can be routed to multiple queues, with separate contact queues for each 
               
               
                   
                 site. Agent skill set and/or human resource capital do not support routing from one 
               
               
                   
                 queue to another. There is location dependence. Routing within a location is 
               
               
                   
                 based on agent skill set. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Contact center virtualization and intelligent routing enable center(s) to function 
               
               
                   
                 as a single, unified entity with location independence where a single queue is 
               
               
                   
                 utilized to prioritize and route calls based on agent skills and availability across 
               
               
                   
                 multiple locations while retaining secure access to corporate information. 
               
               
                   
                 What level of effort is required for moves/adds/changes/deletes (MACs) to your 
               
               
                   
                 organization&#39;s data and communication network&#39;s infrastructure? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - MACs require administrative intervention to accomplish physical relocation of 
               
               
                   
                 telephony instruments and extensive, system modifications due to physical 
               
               
                   
                 constraints. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - MACs require administrative intervention at a vendor specific or location specific 
               
               
                   
                 level, but are not performed as an integrated whole. There is usually a telephony 
               
               
                   
                 hybrid solution with a perceived migration path to IP. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - MACs are done in real time with no administrative intervention. MAC costs are 
               
               
                   
                 greatly reduced and swing and churn space are minimized or eliminated. Typically 
               
               
                   
                 a fully IP environment. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree are your call center channels integrated? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Single channel call center with little perceived business need to expand into 
               
               
                   
                 multiple channels. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Contact center with disparate voice and data platforms limits multichannel 
               
               
                   
                 integration. Technology makes it cost-prohibitive to integrate. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Multichannel integration over a common platform allows economies of scale 
               
               
                   
                 toward telephony capacity and agent staffing. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your telephony equipment infrastructure, and 
               
               
                   
                 the resources required to support it? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The organization maintains a premise based systems at each location with 
               
               
                   
                 shared telecom expertise resources. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The organization maintains a premise based systems at each location with a 
               
               
                   
                 telecom expert at each site. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The organization has consolidated of telephony equipment with a limited number 
               
               
                   
                 of experts able to manage the equipment centrally. 
               
               
                 Disaster 
                 What is the primary driver that determines your organization&#39;s disaster recovery 
               
               
                 Recovery 
                 prioritization schedule? 
               
               
                 Planning 
                 1 - Data processing functions drive prioritization without consideration of the 
               
               
                   
                 business or technology impacts. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - IT operations drives prioritization, addresses key technology impacts. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Business, technology and customer need drives prioritization of mission critical 
               
               
                   
                 business operations and processes. 
               
               
                   
                 How extensive are your firm&#39;s disaster recovery policies and procedures? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There are minimal policies and procedures for recovery and restoration plans. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There are comprehensive policies and procedures for technology recovery and 
               
               
                   
                 restoration plans. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There are action oriented recovery and restoration plans synchronizing 
               
               
                   
                 operations and technology that are validated through periodic rehearsal of disaster 
               
               
                   
                 scenarios. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s data management backup 
               
               
                   
                 process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Regularly scheduled backups to tape. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Regularly scheduled backups to tape and archived off site. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Real time back-ups across centers over the network. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your data processing environment? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The data processing environment is isolated and secure. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There are alternative data or call centers with Uninterruptible Power Supply 
               
               
                   
                 (UPS), generators, cooling, security and fire suppression systems. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The data processing environment distributed over two or more centers for 
               
               
                   
                 disaster recovery planning and high availability. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s technology resiliency 
               
               
                   
                 measures? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Fully redundant disk system. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Failover server architecture. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Fully redundant data server architecture. 
               
               
                   
                 Who prioritizes, manages, and maintains your organization&#39;s information technology 
               
               
                   
                 architecture inventory? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Inventory of IT infrastructure is managed by business units. Maintenance is 
               
               
                   
                 mostly reactive and performed on as needed basis. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Centralized IT hardware inventory managed within IT including identification of 
               
               
                   
                 mission critical applications. Maintenance is performed according to vendor defined 
               
               
                   
                 maintenance schedules. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Hardware and Software Inventory is centrally managed by IT, prioritized 
               
               
                   
                 regularly by the business units with failover systems implemented for critical 
               
               
                   
                 applications. Defined maintenance schedules, testing and exercises, and 
               
               
                   
                 performance monitoring normal part of business. 
               
               
                 Home 
                 To what extent are remote agents included in your disaster recovery planning? 
               
               
                 Agent 
                 1 - Systems requirements and configuration are defined at a generic level with no 
               
               
                   
                 redundancy or high availability plan in-place. Agents are offline in the event of 
               
               
                   
                 failure. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Informal system requirements and configuration (hardware, applications and 
               
               
                   
                 desktop displays) definition process causes disparity between in-house and remote 
               
               
                   
                 agents. There is only partial redundancy which may require temporary transfer of 
               
               
                   
                 workload until home agent connectivity has recovered from failure. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There are thorough and formal system requirements and configuration 
               
               
                   
                 (hardware, applications and desktop displays) definition process which drives 
               
               
                   
                 consistency between in house and remote agents. There are REAL TIME statistics 
               
               
                   
                 and other relevant information and also full redundancy to support high availability 
               
               
                   
                 in the event of failure. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your company&#39;s call routing system for 
               
               
                   
                 remote agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Premise based technology that supports remote connections for use with skills 
               
               
                   
                 based routing determined by IVR selections and agent skills. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Intelligent call management technology to ensure efficient call traffic 
               
               
                   
                 management and agent utilization. Data directed routing is accomplished by using 
               
               
                   
                 of REAL TIME analytics to drive routing decisions. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Advanced conditional routing through a workflow engine to support the creation 
               
               
                   
                 of sophisticated routing algorithms that can factor business intelligence, call center 
               
               
                   
                 metrics and customer data dependencies are factors in determining optimal routing 
               
               
                   
                 decisions. 
               
               
                   
                 Please describe how your organization performs quality control and performance 
               
               
                   
                 monitoring on remote agents. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Remote monitoring for quality management is primarily focused on checking for 
               
               
                   
                 background noise. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Full management features for remote monitoring, REAL TIME statistics and 
               
               
                   
                 reporting on agent status and performance. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Full management features for remote REAL TIME and recorded audio and video 
               
               
                   
                 monitoring, REAL TIME statistics and reporting on agent status and performance. 
               
               
                   
                 Please describe the security measures your organization utilizes for remote 
               
               
                   
                 agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Existing corporate security policies and procedures are applied to remote 
               
               
                   
                 workforce technologies. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Corporate security policies and procedures are adapted to the special 
               
               
                   
                 circumstances surrounding remote access and security of information and provides 
               
               
                   
                 a secure connection back to the host. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Comprehensive security measures are developed for the special circumstances 
               
               
                   
                 surrounding remote agents (password documentation, destruction of confidential 
               
               
                   
                 information, etc). 
               
               
                   
                 What level of technology resources facilitate communication and decision making 
               
               
                   
                 for remote agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Access to knowledge base and email capability between remote and in-house 
               
               
                   
                 agents. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Access to knowledge base and additional capabilities such as secure instant 
               
               
                   
                 messaging, employee chat forums and e-bulletin board capability for remote agents 
               
               
                   
                 and in-house agents to share knowledge and expertise. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Access to knowledge base and use of presence technology that identifies 
               
               
                   
                 current location and denotes access methods for other remote agents, in-house 
               
               
                   
                 agents, and non-contact center subject matter experts. 
               
               
                 Communications 
                 When thinking about your facility&#39;s communications network infrastructure 
               
               
                 Network 
                 (specifically the network access points, into the building and the carriers providing 
               
               
                 Infrastructure 
                 the network service) which statement best describes your susceptibility to a single 
               
               
                   
                 point of failure? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Single network route in place to the building provided by a single carrier. OR, a 
               
               
                   
                 Single network route in place to the building even if the network service is provided 
               
               
                   
                 by multiple carriers. Physical breaks in the access point results in total network 
               
               
                   
                 failure. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Multiple routes into the building but still provided by a single carrier. Outages 
               
               
                   
                 only occur at carrier level. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Multiple routes into the building, and multiple carriers provide service. Full 
               
               
                   
                 redundancy preventing any single points of failure. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your network&#39;s failover capability? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Failover is performed manually. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Automated local Telco failover, with manual failover at the carrier level. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Automated fail-over with back-up and recovery capabilities. Seamless 
               
               
                   
                 transition through outages with full redundancy (routes and access points). 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your network availability up time? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Network availability is below three nines (less than 99.9% up time). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Network is available 99.9% of the time or greater. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Network availability is equal to or greater than four nines (over 99.99% up time). 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your network&#39;s bandwidth/circuit capacity? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Minimal bandwidth/circuit availability. Available bandwidth may be isolated 
               
               
                   
                 rather than centralized. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Large blocks of bandwidth/circuit available, but may be isolated and not 
               
               
                   
                 available for centralized use. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Large blocks of centralized bandwidth/circuit available. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your network response time? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Coast to Coast Network response time of 200 milliseconds or greater with 
               
               
                   
                 lower level of reliability based on analog network (GS/LS/E&amp;M/DID). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Coast to Coast Network response of 100-200 milliseconds with reliable service 
               
               
                   
                 (T1 using GS/LS/E&amp;M/DID). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Coast to Coast Network response time less than 100 milliseconds using state- 
               
               
                   
                 of-the-art technologies (BRI ISDN, PRI ISDN, SS7, VOIP). 
               
               
                 Sourcing 
                 How would you describe the process your firm uses to procure communications 
               
               
                 Optimization 
                 gear (telephony and network)? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Labor-intensive and fragmented buying processes. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Manual, standardized communications sourcing procedures. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Standardized communications sourcing procedures with dedicated category 
               
               
                   
                 experts and use of sourcing automation tools and analytics. 
               
               
                   
                 Please describe the level of expertise in the carrier relations resources in your 
               
               
                   
                 organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Lack of understanding of the services and rates available to meet 
               
               
                   
                 communications needs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Understanding of services and rates but lack of insight into market conditions 
               
               
                   
                 and carrier strategies in order to maximize purchasing power. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Full understanding of services, rates and market conditions which is used to 
               
               
                   
                 exploit fluctuations in market conditions and carrier strategies. 
               
               
                   
                 How frequently does your organization renegotiate its communications (data and 
               
               
                   
                 telephony) contracts? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Communication services are infrequently renegotiated upon expiration of 
               
               
                   
                 contracts due to a lack of understanding of all services currently being used or 
               
               
                   
                 needed. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Communications contracts are renegotiated only at expiration. There may be 
               
               
                   
                 contract tracking systems, but the organization is not able to effectively apply solid 
               
               
                   
                 or proactive management of the contracts. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Communications contracts are renegotiated both at and between expiration 
               
               
                   
                 dates due to thorough understanding of current service usage (with beginning and 
               
               
                   
                 expiration dates), future service needs, tracking of SLAs, and multiple carrier 
               
               
                   
                 options. 
               
               
                   
                 How well does technology support your organization&#39;s telecom service procurement 
               
               
                   
                 process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Manual procurement and sourcing tools and informal processes based on partial 
               
               
                   
                 understanding of communications needs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Use of automated procurement and sourcing tools and formal processes based 
               
               
                   
                 on full understanding of internal needs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Leveraging of online sourcing and procurement tools such as reverse auctions, 
               
               
                   
                 online RFx-based negotiations and to create competitive bidding markets and 
               
               
                   
                 streamline sourcing processes based on complete understanding of 
               
               
                   
                 communications needs. 
               
               
                   
                 How well does the procurement team understand the company&#39;s communications 
               
               
                   
                 needs? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Partial understanding of communications needs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Full understanding of internal communication needs and partial understanding 
               
               
                   
                 of external communication needs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Complete understanding of internal and external communications needs. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s procurement metrics? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Metrics are not utilized to evaluate procurement and sourcing effectiveness. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Infrequent evaluation of or use of inconsistent metrics to evaluate procurement 
               
               
                   
                 and sourcing effectiveness. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Methodology for frequent evaluation of procurement and sourcing effectiveness 
               
               
                   
                 through consistent metrics. 
               
               
                 Vendor 
                 What level of documented vendor requirements or “needs analysis” is performed 
               
               
                 Selection 
                 prior to vendor selection? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - A needs analysis is not conducted prior to Request For Proposal (RFP) 
               
               
                   
                 development. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - A needs analysis is conducted on a departmental or specific project basis 
               
               
                   
                 without consideration of enterprise business objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A detailed needs analysis is conducted prior to RFP development which 
               
               
                   
                 prioritizes requirements based on a deep understanding of enterprise business 
               
               
                   
                 objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the detail included on your vendor Request for 
               
               
                   
                 Proposal (RFP)? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - RFP does not adequately document user requirements, and lacks alignment to 
               
               
                   
                 business objectives. The RFP creates more ambiguity and rework than solutions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - RFP documents user requirements but lacks enterprise business objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - RFP outlines selection criteria and process and contains user requirements and 
               
               
                   
                 enterprise business objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 How are vendor questions regarding RFPs (Requests For Proposal) handled? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Adequate resources have not been identified to address vendor questions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Vendor questions are parsed to multiple individuals for response and 
               
               
                   
                 dissemination. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A single point of contact is established for vendor questions and responses to 
               
               
                   
                 questions are developed and disseminated quickly. 
               
               
                   
                 How are vendor&#39;s responses assessed? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Personal biases are involved in vendor assessment. The focus is on getting the 
               
               
                   
                 latest features and functionality at the lowest cost. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Quantitative information is used to assess vendors. The focus is on balancing 
               
               
                   
                 pricing and features and functionality that are deemed critical. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A rigorous vendor rating system is used to objectively assess quantitative 
               
               
                   
                 (pricing and features and functionality) and qualitative (extensibility and scalability 
               
               
                   
                 of platform, availability of support, implementation support) information. 
               
               
                   
                 How much consideration is given to a vendor&#39;s Service Level Agreements (SLAs), 
               
               
                   
                 terms and conditions during the selection process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Vendor SLAs and contractual terms and conditions are not considered during 
               
               
                   
                 selection process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Vendor SLAs and contractual terms and conditions are considered and meet 
               
               
                   
                 most of the company requirements. (It is possible the company&#39;s requirements may 
               
               
                   
                 be out of synch with the market) 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Vendor SLAs and contractual terms and conditions are considered and are fully 
               
               
                   
                 meet the company requirements and align with organizational goals and needs. 
               
               
                 Network 
                 Which statement best describes the use of network performance metrics in your 
               
               
                 Performance 
                 organization? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - Organization has limited performance metrics focused on outage conditions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Organization has defined network performance metrics with loosely defined 
               
               
                   
                 severity definitions for all monitored events. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Organization has fully documented, and clearly defined network performance 
               
               
                   
                 metrics with distinct impairment and outage severities. 
               
               
                   
                 How are network performance service levels monitored and tracked to ensure 
               
               
                   
                 adherence? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - SLA&#39;s (Service Level Agreement) performance is not tracked internally. 
               
               
                   
                 Dependant on vendors to report SLA performance. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Internal OLA&#39;s (Operating Level Agreements) are defined and tracked but are 
               
               
                   
                 not developed or refined based on dependant vendor SLA&#39;s. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - OLA&#39;s are generated from vendor SLA&#39;s. Additional measures are also 
               
               
                   
                 developed for accurate surveillance and troubleshooting to differentiate internal and 
               
               
                   
                 external performance issues. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes network maintenance change control 
               
               
                   
                 practices? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Maintenance is performed after hours and on weekends as work is identified. 
               
               
                   
                 Increased diligence and communication is expected but not enforced for larger 
               
               
                   
                 activities/upgrades. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Organization has rudimentary network change control process where changes 
               
               
                   
                 and upgrades are performed during established maintenance windows. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Organization has well documented and robust network change control process 
               
               
                   
                 that defines criteria for approval, approval chain, and establishes strictly enforced 
               
               
                   
                 maintenance windows. 
               
               
                   
                 What is the sophistication level of your network performance monitoring software? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Organization utilizes rudimentary software for network performance monitoring 
               
               
                   
                 and focuses primarily on the physical and application network layers. Software 
               
               
                   
                 primarily provides up/down status. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Organization recognizes varying layers of the network (e.g. OSI network model) 
               
               
                   
                 and employs holistic software for monitoring each of the layers. Thresholds are 
               
               
                   
                 created and deployed to monitor severity levels. RFO (Requests For Outage) are 
               
               
                   
                 performed ah-hoc at customer request. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Organization utilizes performance monitoring software that contains tool sets for 
               
               
                   
                 setting thresholds based on severity and frequency and is integrated into ticketing 
               
               
                   
                 and auto-repair toolsets. Standard RFO criteria are established and event 
               
               
                   
                 documentation is produced whenever exceeded. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the level of network monitoring within your 
               
               
                   
                 organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Normal business hours and on-call after hours support personnel are utilized to 
               
               
                   
                 detect and/or repair issues. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Decentralized groups monitor network based on function and layer (e.g. 
               
               
                   
                 infrastructure, telecomm, IT) with varying hours of support based on user 
               
               
                   
                 demographics. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A 7 × 24 centralized NOC (network operations center) is in place for surveillance 
               
               
                   
                 and monitoring to proactively detect, correlate and repair the network as events 
               
               
                   
                 occur with formal escalation processes defined for all internal and external 
               
               
                   
                 infrastructure, systems and applications. 
               
               
                 Capacity 
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s communications 
               
               
                 Management 
                 infrastructure strategy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No communications infrastructure strategy exists due to labor intensive manual 
               
               
                   
                 data monitoring, collation and report production which hinders capacity planning. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Communication strategy is place but limited by decentralized tracking and 
               
               
                   
                 reporting at the device level. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A comprehensive communications strategy which outlines current and future 
               
               
                   
                 communications needs. Strategy development and refinement is supported by 
               
               
                   
                 centralized and automated tracking and reporting of network-wide usage statistics. 
               
               
                   
                 To what degree does your company utilize statistical models to determine network 
               
               
                   
                 or telephony capacity requirements? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Statistical models are not used to determine capacity requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Use of a single statistical model to determine capacity requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Use of multivariable statistical models to determine capacity requirements (e.g. 
               
               
                   
                 considers projected growth, historical trending, seasonality, contingency overflow 
               
               
                   
                 needs). 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s telephony or network 
               
               
                   
                 capacity planning? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Capacity planning is not done. It is considered time-consuming, costly and 
               
               
                   
                 difficult. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Capacity planning is done on only the most mission critical telephony hardware 
               
               
                   
                 and communications links, and/or data network hardware components, applications 
               
               
                   
                 and connectivity links. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Capacity planning is an iterative and integral process where available capacity, 
               
               
                   
                 and performance SLAs are monitored and managed for all business critical 
               
               
                   
                 communication components. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent is your organization able to collect and analyze telephony or 
               
               
                   
                 network capacity data? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Capacity related information is difficult to collect and analyze. If data is 
               
               
                   
                 collected, it is a manual process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Capacity related information is available but incomplete. Data is often 
               
               
                   
                 decentralized or only available at the device level. Integrated reporting can be 
               
               
                   
                 manual with some automated methods. It is used reactively to solve problems, or 
               
               
                   
                 for future planning purposes. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Proper and complete capacity related information is centrally available and used 
               
               
                   
                 on a consistent, automated basis for baseline establishment and trending. Allows 
               
               
                   
                 confident what-if analysis to determine effect of, possible changes. 
               
               
                 Communications 
                 Which statement best describes the format of the communications bill that your 
               
               
                 Expense 
                 organization receives? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - Multiple bills received in paper formats. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Centralized bill received in paper or electronic format, inability to upload 
               
               
                   
                 electronic media completely if in electronic format. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Electronic billing media to enable reporting and analysis, system to upload 
               
               
                   
                 electronic media, relational database with invoice and contract reconciliation, 
               
               
                   
                 allocation templates. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are your company&#39;s communications expenses audited? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The majority of bills are not audited and simply paid in full. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Only largest spend subset of communications invoices are audited, generally a 
               
               
                   
                 lack of visibility to wireless expenditures (wireless expenditures are reimbursed 
               
               
                   
                 through employee expense reports). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Proactive management of all or close to all communications expenditures 
               
               
                   
                 through regular and repeatable auditing of all communications bills with all 
               
               
                   
                 components of bill evaluated. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your company&#39;s contract management methods for 
               
               
                   
                 communications expenses? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Communications contracts are not compared with benchmarks for the best 
               
               
                   
                 pricing. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Limited visibility into contracts for bill validation, contracts are stored in paper 
               
               
                   
                 format or in disparate systems/databases. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Centralized contract repository with automated capability to link contracts to 
               
               
                   
                 billing to reduce leakage and enable negotiating for price reduction opportunities. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your company&#39;s communications bill payment and 
               
               
                   
                 reconciliation methods? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Excessive bill processing times cause late payment penalties. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Bill is paid in full and reconciled manually after the fact. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Use of invoice reconciliation and analytics automation and support to achieve 
               
               
                   
                 faster invoice auditing and processing cycles. Automation identifies discrepancies 
               
               
                   
                 in bill and percentage of differences to target reconciliation efforts. 
               
               
                   
                 Who in your company is responsible for managing communications expenses? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Information Technology (IT) department has primary responsibility to manage 
               
               
                   
                 communications expenses. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Communications responsibility is decentralized with departmental control over 
               
               
                   
                 budgets. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Centralized control in one corporate function that has a mandate to uphold 
               
               
                   
                 policies and institute systems for control. 
               
               
                 Security 
                 How would you describe your company&#39;s approach to IT infrastructure security? 
               
               
                 Approach 
                 1 - Network services management focused approach. Often the emphasis is 
               
               
                   
                 primarily to provide infrastructure protection. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Technical issue focused approach. Often the emphasis is standardization of 
               
               
                   
                 security practices across the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Business capability focused approach. The emphasis for security is to balance 
               
               
                   
                 cost and risk. 
               
               
                   
                 How is the security of your IT infrastructure viewed by your company? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Security viewed as a burden to the enterprise, out of scope, not in budget, 
               
               
                   
                 afterthought. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Security viewed as an expense with a protective stance and focus on 
               
               
                   
                 monitoring. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Security viewed as a strategic investment with an enabling stance and focused 
               
               
                   
                 on holistic threat assessment. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe the scope of your company&#39;s infrastructure security? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - It is application-centric without specific regard to threats. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - It is practice-centric to defend against external threats as identified. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - It is Process-centric in support of mission critical customer driven business 
               
               
                   
                 processes and proactive defense against threats. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your organization&#39;s approach to implementing its 
               
               
                   
                 infrastructure security? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - The approach is primarily reactive to the environment and driven by experience. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The approach emphasizes survivability and managing to threats and perceived 
               
               
                   
                 vulnerability. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - The approach emphasizes enterprise level resiliency, managing to threats and 
               
               
                   
                 potential impact to the business. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe the methodology of ensuring the security of your IT 
               
               
                   
                 infrastructure? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Reactive and improvised to most situations. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Tactical but irregular approach (defensive approach) to threat situations. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Strategic (offensive approach) to situations while being, adaptive, deliberate and 
               
               
                   
                 systematic. 
               
               
                 Information 
                 Which statement best describes your information and technology security 
               
               
                 and 
                 infrastructure? 
               
               
                 Technology 
                 1 - Firewalls at network entry points. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Firewalls at network entry points and some application levels. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Use of multiple layers of firewalls, intrusion detection, client PC virus software, 
               
               
                   
                 server-based virus checking and root level password protection for all network 
               
               
                   
                 elements. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of data protection measures are in place? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Limited email encryption or monitoring capabilities. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - E-mail encryption and “authorized use” policies implemented and monitored. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Technology monitored “data protection rules” prevent users from unauthorized 
               
               
                   
                 saving, printing or transmitting customer information. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your customer information storage practices? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Storage of customer information storage is based simply on data storage 
               
               
                   
                 capacity. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Data retention policy around customer data is documented however, there is a 
               
               
                   
                 limited ability to monitor day to day activities. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Customer information storage is systematically kept to a minimum. Data 
               
               
                   
                 retention policy is focused on requirements for business, legal, and/or regulatory 
               
               
                   
                 purposes. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are security requirements considered during the software 
               
               
                   
                 development or acquisition process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Security requirements are not evaluated during the software development or 
               
               
                   
                 acquisition process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Security requirements are frequently part of the software development or 
               
               
                   
                 acquisition process. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Standard security requirements are tested and implemented throughout 
               
               
                   
                 selection, procurement, development, testing, deployment and production life 
               
               
                   
                 cycles. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your information and technology security policy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Security policy is established and communicated to organization leadership. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - A security policy is established, maintained, and disseminated that addresses 
               
               
                   
                 requirements and accountability for all employees. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Security and intellectual property policy includes contractors and vendors, 
               
               
                   
                 ongoing monitoring and evaluation practices as well as frequent risk assessment 
               
               
                   
                 based on business objectives and environment. 
               
               
                   
                 How often does your organization evaluate the security of its infrastructure? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Security is evaluated reactively as threats are identified. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Security is evaluated proactively but manually based on potential risk analyses. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Automated security technologies constantly probe for threats and weaknesses. 
               
               
                 People &amp; 
                 How is physical entry into your facility managed? 
               
               
                 Facilities 
                 1 - Security officers and personnel photo identification cards. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Electronic access control - Magnetic strip access or identification cards. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Layered identification cards with hidden text and nano printing (overt, covert 
               
               
                   
                 and forensic visual security); smart cards containing microprocessors; biometric 
               
               
                   
                 controlled access. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of screening methods are used for your job applicants? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Reference checks and drug screening. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Background checks including credit, criminal history, and education. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Personnel Reliability Programs (PRP) with the ability to assess employees 
               
               
                   
                 loyalty, trustworthiness, mental stability, and affinity towards violence and 
               
               
                   
                 exploitation. 
               
               
                   
                 What preventative measures are taken to ensure safety and avoid risk? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Sporadic emphasis on safety training and risk assessments with site level 
               
               
                   
                 accountability, that includes security assessment in site selection process, but lacks 
               
               
                   
                 offshore emergency planning structure (if offshore is applicable). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Safety training and risk assessments with regional or business unit 
               
               
                   
                 accountability that includes annual self-security assessments and minimal offshore 
               
               
                   
                 emergency planning capability (if offshore is applicable). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Enterprise mandated safety, risk, and response training executed at site level 
               
               
                   
                 that includes annual self-security assessments plus periodic third party security 
               
               
                   
                 assessments and formally defined offshore emergency planning capability updated 
               
               
                   
                 and/or refined at least annually (if offshore is applicable). 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of prevention tools are used to prohibit unauthorized access to your 
               
               
                   
                 facility? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Security personnel, physical barriers and key card access. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Integrated access control with closed-circuit television cameras; work space 
               
               
                   
                 compartmentalization; electronic/magnetic door locks; minimal perimeter security. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Biometrics applications to closed circuit television capabilities; fully integrated 
               
               
                   
                 perimeter security to include employee parking lots. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of methods are used for fraud detection and prevention? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Reactive response to fraudulent activities and no fraud tracking system. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some ability to prevent fraudulent activities (ex: agents trained to identify 
               
               
                   
                 possible fraudulent activities and use login based access to business systems). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Defined methods of predicting and preventing fraudulent activities using trend 
               
               
                   
                 analysis, agent activity monitoring applications, and biometric access to business 
               
               
                   
                 systems. 
               
               
                 Data 
                 Describe your organization&#39;s data ownership and accountability practices. 
               
               
                 Governance 
                 1 - Data is scattered throughout the organization with no ownership or 
               
               
                   
                 accountability for data quality. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The IT organization maintains sole ownership with data steward accountability 
               
               
                   
                 for data quality. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Joint ownership of data between IT and business teams with process owner 
               
               
                   
                 accountability for data quality. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of processes are in place to manage changes to your organization&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 data? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data is accessible “on demand” by a number of non-standardized tools without 
               
               
                   
                 consideration of permissions based access. There are no formal data standards for 
               
               
                   
                 what is published in a warehouse. Requests are satisfied with no long term 
               
               
                   
                 process to integrate sources into a common structure for use across the business. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There are department specific processes to add new data sources and 
               
               
                   
                 integrate into the data warehouse. Changes made are not made available to the 
               
               
                   
                 rest of the business. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Formal process in place to add new sources and integrate information into the 
               
               
                   
                 data warehouse. Once changes are made, modifications are available to all users 
               
               
                   
                 and are communicated to ensure awareness across user communities. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the level of standardization for data naming 
               
               
                   
                 conventions and data calculations? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Non-standardized naming conventions and multiple, data definitions and/or 
               
               
                   
                 calculations throughout the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Naming conventions standardized but there are multiple data definitions and/or 
               
               
                   
                 calculations throughout the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Naming conventions and calculations/definitions standardized by business best 
               
               
                   
                 practice with data arbitration. 
               
               
                   
                 How defined and accessible is your organization&#39;s meta data? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data definitions are partially defined with no centralized management. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Meta Data is defined but is housed in siloed data dictionaries. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Meta Data is well defined and accessible across the enterprise. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your organization&#39;s data platform? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data is spread across multiple databases and multiple platforms with no 
               
               
                   
                 standardization or integration in place. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Use of a single platform with multiple departmental databases based on 
               
               
                   
                 individual needs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Use of a single, standardized and integrated database platform to support 
               
               
                   
                 business intelligence needs. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of data access tools are in place? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data access to sources is not standardized or monitored. Investment in 
               
               
                   
                 multiple access platforms may occur. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Standard access tool is in place but utilization is not tracked or required. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Use of a centrally managed corporate access tool for all business intelligence 
               
               
                   
                 needs. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of data access tool training is in place? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Centralized training does not exist. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Training often has to address central access tool as well as other tools which 
               
               
                   
                 leads to non-standard training or other inefficiencies. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Centralized training of tools is in place to ensure common understanding of tool 
               
               
                   
                 sets and data elements. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your organization&#39;s level of data source 
               
               
                   
                 integration? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data sources are created with ad hoc data which may satisfy single needs but 
               
               
                   
                 provides no structure or knowledge across the business. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Data sources are defined and accessible by business unit for unique needs, 
               
               
                   
                 however enterprise view of data is not available. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Integrated and accessible data sources provide information across the 
               
               
                   
                 enterprise. 
               
               
                 Data Quality 
                 How would you describe the defect prevention methods and standards in place for 
               
               
                 Management 
                 data quality management? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Use of data defect detection is at the application level, with varying use of 
               
               
                   
                 standards. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Use of unified standards to detect data defects. Individual business domains 
               
               
                   
                 are responsible for compliance with standards. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Unified standards are adopted at the enterprise-wide level to prevent data 
               
               
                   
                 defects. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the data de-duplication standards in your 
               
               
                   
                 organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data de-duplication standards are not used. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Data de-duplication is done in real time as data is stored on disk with risk of 
               
               
                   
                 unique data being deleted. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - De-duplication done as background task after data stored in system. Every 
               
               
                   
                 byte is compared, ensuring 100% data fidelity. 
               
               
                   
                 How are data defects detected? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Detection of data errors is based on reports of problems with no automated 
               
               
                   
                 monitoring in place. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Automated, rules-based error detection is in place, coupled with manually 
               
               
                   
                 reported data errors. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Automated error detection is in place with proactive source data filters to 
               
               
                   
                 identify and fix problems. 
               
               
                   
                 How are data defects cleansed? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Cleansing is based on reactive research to identify and fix problems. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Data cleansing process is reactive based on errors that are found. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Data cleansing process is proactive. 
               
               
                   
                 Which best describes the data quality metrics utilized? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data quality metrics are non existent or non-standardized. There is no process 
               
               
                   
                 in place to ensure accountability of data quality. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Data quality measured through granular metrics but processes are not defined 
               
               
                   
                 to promote accountability. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Data quality process is in place based on the ability to manage data, not just 
               
               
                   
                 based on errors captured. Processes are in place to hold individuals accountable 
               
               
                   
                 for data quality. 
               
               
                   
                 How are data quality issues addressed? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Quality issues not addressed due to lack of quality metrics and feedback. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Quality issues addressed in warehouse and analytic reporting platforms. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Quality issues are addressed at the source for target analytic data. 
               
               
                 Data 
                 What types of data does your organization utilize? 
               
               
                 Enhancement 
                 1 - Internal data is captured in core business systems. Internal demographic data 
               
               
                   
                 may be derived. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Internal data is captured in a basic data warehouse and may be combined with 
               
               
                   
                 purchased demographic/firmographic data. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Internal data is managed and coupled with purchased 
               
               
                   
                 demographic/firmographic as well as attitudinal, behavioral, and Customer 
               
               
                   
                 Satisfaction (CSAT) data in a robust data warehouse. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s use of integrated data for 
               
               
                   
                 decisioning?  
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data is used for back office analysis and decision making, with no integration 
               
               
                   
                 with front office or customer service for decision making. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Data is mostly used for back-office analysis and decisioning, with some access 
               
               
                   
                 for customer service to review transactional data during contacts. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Information is fully integrated with front office decisioning. Data analytics are 
               
               
                   
                 used to calculate and push decisions to the customer service team to drive 
               
               
                   
                 customer treatment and offers. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you descnbe your organization&#39;s ability to validate its data? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Limited or no ability to test the validity of data and how it is used for decision 
               
               
                   
                 making. Assume data does what it should. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Steps are in place to periodically validate data for accuracy, with no formal 
               
               
                   
                 process to cleanse data problems. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Robust ability to validate the utility of data through alignment with data 
               
               
                   
                 governance practices. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the relevancy of your company&#39;s data? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data not refreshed and quickly loses relevance to ensure adequate decision 
               
               
                   
                 making. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Data used for analytic guidance but is not refreshed in timely manner to ensure 
               
               
                   
                 relevant real time decisioning. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Analytic engine is self-learning to harvest data and ensure decisions are based 
               
               
                   
                 on current information. Purchased data is regularly refreshed to ensure business 
               
               
                   
                 relevance. 
               
               
                 Data Privacy 
                 How is the effectiveness of your data investment measured? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Data investment is not measured to ensure investments are driving results. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some measurement of program success when integrated data is used, with no 
               
               
                   
                 direct links to tie success to data versus other factors. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Use of integrated data is measured and tracked to ensure proper return on 
               
               
                   
                 investment from purchased data and analytic investments. 
               
               
                   
                 What encryption methods are used to ensure the privacy of your customer&#39;s data? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Minimal standards for data encryption. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Encryption of data in flight with decryption at rest through SSL and VPNs. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - 3DES or AES encryption of the data warehouse, encryption/decryption takes 
               
               
                   
                 place as data is moved into and out of the database. 
               
               
                   
                 How is your organization&#39;s data privacy program communicated? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Privacy program poorly defined and communicated. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Employee awareness of privacy program requirements and appropriate use of 
               
               
                   
                 information. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Employee and third party awareness of privacy program requirements and 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate use of information. 
               
               
                   
                 Which best describes the extent to which database auditing is employed to ensure 
               
               
                   
                 customer data privacy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Limited database auditing capabilities. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Database auditing through basic trending analysis of overall identification and 
               
               
                   
                 authentication, authorization, usage and performance. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Database auditing through trending of granular metrics for number of individual 
               
               
                   
                 identifications and authentications, authorizations, usage and performance. 
               
               
                   
                 How is your organization notified of potential threats to data privacy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Experience and react, threat is not visible until it occurs. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Manual threat identification through trending. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Automated real-time notification of threat events with configurable alert 
               
               
                   
                 thresholds, real-time alerts and session auditing. 
               
               
                 Data  
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s data compliance 
               
               
                 Compliance 
                 (accountability, integrity, custodianship, risk management and standardization) 
               
               
                 Management 
                 management strategy? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Compliance initiatives are considered a hindrance to efficient business practice. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Compliance initiatives are established reactively and are not part of the 
               
               
                   
                 strategic business plan. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Compliance initiatives are considered in support of the basic strategy. 
               
               
                   
                 Who in your organization is accountable for data compliance (accountability, 
               
               
                   
                 integrity, custodianship, risk management and standardization) management? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Individual accountability with no management oversight. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Group accountability without management control. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Management accountability through review to make sure appropriate standards 
               
               
                   
                 are met. 
               
               
                   
                 What level of custodial obligation do your corporate leaders have for data 
               
               
                   
                 compliance management? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Corporate leaders have a custodial obligation to protect the financial value of 
               
               
                   
                 the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Corporate leaders have a custodial obligation to protect the company reputation 
               
               
                   
                 and financial value of the organization. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Corporate leaders have a custodial obligation to protect the company 
               
               
                   
                 reputation, financial value of the organization and customer data. 
               
               
                   
                 How are risk assessments and controls used for data compliance management? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No risks assessments are conducted. Controls for customer data have not been 
               
               
                   
                 defined, or are outdated. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Risk assessments are conducted to capture the tangible costs but strength of 
               
               
                   
                 controls for customer data are not evaluated. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - True risk assessments are conducted to capture opportunity costs of tangible 
               
               
                   
                 and potential intangible losses and evaluate the strength of controls for customer 
               
               
                   
                 data. 
               
               
                   
                 What role does standardization play in your data compliance management efforts? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Non-standardized data structures and architecture 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Standardization as a means of meeting operational objectives for streamlining. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Architectural standardization as a means of meeting compliance and risk 
               
               
                   
                 challenges. 
               
               
                 Integration 
                 How would you describe your organization&#39;s methodology for data integration? 
               
               
                 Competency 
                 1 - Integration processes are managed on a project by project basis. Best 
               
               
                 Centers 
                 practices and standards are not leveraged across all projects. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Integration strategy defined in technical requirements established by system 
               
               
                   
                 silo SMEs, data stewards and/or systems engineers during data warehouse 
               
               
                   
                 implementation. Complies with industry accepted Data warehouse best practices. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Federated Enterprise integration strategy defining uniform approaches and 
               
               
                   
                 techniques for re-use to stream-line data integration by the direction of the 
               
               
                   
                 governance center which defines and set&#39;s the integration policies, processes and 
               
               
                   
                 standards and architecture. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of governance or policies exist for data integration? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Business users are reliant on developer and/or programmer to govern and 
               
               
                   
                 handle underlying integration techniques on an ad-hoc basis. These are accepted 
               
               
                   
                 by the business user at the end of the implementation. Governance policy is loose 
               
               
                   
                 and is defined by what produces the delivered results. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Integration maps objects, and/or stored procedures are defined, and governed 
               
               
                   
                 by ETL and/or integration developer teams to conform to standards for code 
               
               
                   
                 maintenance and reuse. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Executive level sponsorship, of governance center having multiple skills both 
               
               
                   
                 business policy and data management. Roles are defined and subject matter 
               
               
                   
                 experts set the governance and policies to set the direction for data integration 
               
               
                   
                 including processes, standards, and architecture before implementation and/or 
               
               
                   
                 development. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your architecture? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Architecture and tools are not standardized nor fluid across projects. 
               
               
                   
                 Integration processes are not unified and may not be reusable. Integration is point 
               
               
                   
                 to point and sometimes ad-hoc. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Architecture enforces technical consistency in software and hardware. 
               
               
                   
                 Integration activities are characteristic of a common platform, although, a central 
               
               
                   
                 technology environment is not, supported. A MetaData repository may exist for 
               
               
                   
                 managing data and integration artifacts. However, allows for developer creativity 
               
               
                   
                 often leading to inconsistent integration techniques and results. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Leverages federated architecture for a consistent, standardized approach to 
               
               
                   
                 integrating and leveraging data assets. Tools are standardized and are shared 
               
               
                   
                 across the enterprise. Provides common and supported technical environments 
               
               
                   
                 and integration hubs adopting UDS (Universal Data Services) approaches to 
               
               
                   
                 delivery and reusability. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the data integration interface tool used by your 
               
               
                   
                 organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - A web page may exist as a data dictionary detailing transformation rules but are 
               
               
                   
                 limited and/or non-existent for integration rules applied across disparate systems. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The interface is the ETL tool and/or MetaData Management tool. Accessibility is 
               
               
                   
                 usually limited to developers and/or data analysts. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - A robust interface allows searchable integration artifacts. Policies can be 
               
               
                   
                 updated and changed via ‘natural language’ and accessed by users, developers 
               
               
                   
                 and policy owners. This typically accomplished via an Enterprise Application 
               
               
                   
                 Integration (EAI) Tool or a Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) toolset. 
               
               
                 Design 
                 How would you describe your organization&#39;s floor space design? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Hierarchical orientation based on job level. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - The emphasis is to minimize the necessary square foot per person by using. 
               
               
                   
                 smaller workstations for agents, while retaining hierarchical orientation for 
               
               
                   
                 remaining positions. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - the emphasis is to provide the “right sized” and more usable workspace. It 
               
               
                   
                 incorporates things like flat screen technology and adjustable keyboard 
               
               
                   
                 mechanisms, efficient furniture configurations with built in ergonomics, that create 
               
               
                   
                 an atmosphere conducive to work. 
               
               
                   
                 Current answers has floor space design and components/ergonomics. 
               
               
                   
                 When thinking about the design of how electrical power is delivered to workstations, 
               
               
                   
                 which statement best describes your company&#39;s use of modular power? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No use of modularity. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some modular electrical components. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Modular solutions for electrical systems. 
               
               
                   
                 When thinking about the design of how communications connectivity is delivered to 
               
               
                   
                 workstations, which statement best describes your company&#39;s use of modular 
               
               
                   
                 data/communications wiring systems? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No use of modularity. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some modularity for data systems; communication remains direct wire. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Modular solutions for data and communications wiring systems. Wiring is 
               
               
                   
                 typically concealed in furniture or the floor or ceiling. 
               
               
                   
                 When thinking about your company&#39;s ability to utilize agent workspaces, which of 
               
               
                   
                 the following best describes your organization&#39;s seating flexibility? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Dedicated seats per agent or work group. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Dedicated seats per work group and flexible location for agents/advisors. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Use of technology to maximize utilization of capacity, especially as program 
               
               
                   
                 changes necessitate seating changes. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the type of amenities available at your facility? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Minimal provisions for break rooms (no food service). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Break Room with vending machines, external smoking area provided. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - On-site food service capabilities; smoking area; employee lounge/break-out 
               
               
                   
                 space. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of training facilities are available at your company? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Limited or no training capabilities on-site. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Training rooms with minimal technology tools. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Training rooms designed with capabilities for multi-media training delivery and 
               
               
                   
                 hands-on training experience. 
               
               
                 Physical 
                 How would you describe the walls in your facility? 
               
               
                 Surroundings 
                 1 - White or beige, empty walls. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Painted walls and motivational artwork with inspirational messages. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Cool hues for a calming and productive work environment to stimulate creativity 
               
               
                   
                 and alertness. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describe the lighting in your facility? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No consideration or priority for lighting. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Direct fluorescent lighting. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Combination of direct and indirect lighting. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of consideration is given to the acoustics in your facility? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No consideration or priority for acoustics. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Some efforts made for sound dampening. Examples can include high cube 
               
               
                   
                 walls, acoustic ceiling and carpeting. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Noise cancellation systems to dampen ambient noise levels; Sound-masking to 
               
               
                   
                 introduce voice spectrum sound waves and minimize acoustic distraction. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of consideration is given to ergonomics for workstations in your 
               
               
                   
                 organization&#39;s contact centers? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Little consideration to ergonomics. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Ergonomics as a program, retrofitting to existing environment. (e.g. There is an 
               
               
                   
                 organization to call if you have a back problem). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Ergonomics as a process that is deployed throughout the organization that 
               
               
                   
                 drives the environment design. 
               
               
                 Site 
                 When opportunities arise to select one customer care site over another, what are 
               
               
                 Selection 
                 the primary drivers for your organization&#39;s site selection decisions? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Site selection decisions are reactive to increased workload and driven primarily 
               
               
                   
                 by labor rate. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Selection decisions are near term focused and driven by primarily by labor rate 
               
               
                   
                 and speed to market. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Selection decisions are considered a strategic investment in the organization&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 future success and part of the overall business strategy driven by long term risk vs. 
               
               
                   
                 reward planning. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your company have access to profile information that provides 
               
               
                   
                 additional “apples to apples” information used to evaluate one site&#39;s attractiveness 
               
               
                   
                 versus another? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Basic site profiles are created or bought whenever sites are needed including 
               
               
                   
                 literacy rates, average salaries, costs of facilities and vendor services. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Site profiles are centrally managed in a database that allows for easy 
               
               
                   
                 comparison. Detailed information expanded to include key workforce 
               
               
                   
                 demographics, competitive employers, access/transportation infrastructure. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Centrally managed site profile that includes up to date assessments of 
               
               
                   
                 geopolitical, disaster and environmental risk, potential labor law issues and local 
               
               
                   
                 government incentives. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s criteria for detailed site 
               
               
                   
                 analysis? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Assessments are generally one dimensional and focus on buy-in costs and Net 
               
               
                   
                 Present Value (NPV). 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Detailed analysis performed that includes potential costs in light of market 
               
               
                   
                 segmentation needs, complexity of work and matching of cultural values. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Proficiency with analysis tools that demonstrate total cost of ownership and 
               
               
                   
                 return on investment and allow evaluation of dimensions such as customer 
               
               
                   
                 segmentation needs, business culture and values and local work ethic. 
               
               
                   
                 Who does your organization partner with to perform site evaluations? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Site selection evaluations performed with property owners. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Site selection evaluations performed with property owners and local 
               
               
                   
                 governments. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Site selection evaluations retain local legal counsel and is performed with 
               
               
                   
                 property owners and local/regional governments. 
               
               
                 Facilities 
                 Which statement best describes the approach to managing existing facilities? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - Task oriented lease negotiation. Limited due diligence. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Engage business unit representatives to provide input on value added 
               
               
                   
                 workplace solutions. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Developing overall workplace solutions that integrate real estate, technology 
               
               
                   
                 and Human Resources. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your company&#39;s facility maintenance? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Routine maintenance programs; decentralized maintenance functions. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Combination of preventive and routine maintenance; centralized facility 
               
               
                   
                 maintenance. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Combination of predictive, preventive and routine maintenance to maximize 
               
               
                   
                 lifecycle of building systems; combination of centralized and local facility 
               
               
                   
                 maintenance to increase consistency and maintain responsiveness. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization manage its maintenance activities? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Manual management of maintenance activities. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Computer-based tracking of maintenance work orders; minimal automation and 
               
               
                   
                 cost reporting. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Computerized maintenance management software (CMMS) support to record 
               
               
                   
                 all work order data, including status and cost to complete. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your company&#39;s energy management (cost) 
               
               
                   
                 considerations? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No energy management considerations. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Energy management systems limited to HVAC systems. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Integrated building management system to control HVAC, lighting and other 
               
               
                   
                 systems for maximum energy efficiency. 
               
               
                 Homeshoring 
                 Which best describes your company&#39;s hiring practices for home-based agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Skills-based assessments that do not identify the characteristics required for a 
               
               
                   
                 successful home-based agent. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Skills and competency-based assessments to understand how agent will 
               
               
                   
                 perform in a home-based environment. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Skills and competency-based assessments combined with personality and 
               
               
                   
                 communication style profiling to understand how agent will perform in a home- 
               
               
                   
                 based environment. 
               
               
                   
                 How often is training conducted for your home-based agents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Initial training with limited follow up. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Initial training with continuation e-learning based on new product launches or 
               
               
                   
                 service offerings. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Initial training with continuation e-learning to fine-tune skills, reinforce 
               
               
                   
                 processes, communicate policy changes and train staff on new product or service 
               
               
                   
                 offerings. 
               
               
                   
                 How are policies and procedures applied to your home-based workforce? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Human resources and legal policies are applied to remote workforce without 
               
               
                   
                 modification. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Human resources and legal polices are reviewed at the onset of the program 
               
               
                   
                 and modified for application to remote workforce. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Human resources and legal polices are routinely reviewed and updated and 
               
               
                   
                 distributed as contractual obligations to the remote workforce. 
               
               
                   
                 How are performance scorecards utilized for your home-based workforce? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Individual agent performance metrics are not provided, operational metrics are 
               
               
                   
                 used for entire agent base, limited feedback capabilities due to lack of individual 
               
               
                   
                 metric comparisons. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Performance-management scorecard that compares remote workforce 
               
               
                   
                 performance against in house staff performance, limited feedback capabilities due 
               
               
                   
                 to lack of individual metric comparisons. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Performance-management scorecards that closely identify organizational goals 
               
               
                   
                 to provide comparison of home-based agent performance to remote and in house 
               
               
                   
                 workforces as well as industry averages to drive consistent performance feedback, 
               
               
                   
                 frequent coaching and timely information. 
               
               
                   
                 What kind of governance structure (leadership and management) is in place for 
               
               
                   
                 your home-based workforce? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Governance structure is not clearly defined. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Siloed governance structure applicable to home-based agents only. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Standardized and centralized governance across all agent types. 
               
               
                 Integration 
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s approach to system 
               
               
                 Methodology 
                 integration? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Continued development of stand alone systems with batch data links and 
               
               
                   
                 multiple interfaces, waiting on new technology approach. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Replacement and package deployment efforts to partially replace existing 
               
               
                   
                 functions, but not to the point that legacy systems can be streamlined or eliminated. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Comprehensive architecture transition strategy to prioritize and drive migration, 
               
               
                   
                 integration, acquisition and replacement efforts of highly coupled, legacy 
               
               
                   
                 applications. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes your organization&#39;s knowledge of current IT 
               
               
                   
                 inventory and the impacts to that inventory from systems integration efforts? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Lack of inventory and categorization of systems leads to potentially conflicting 
               
               
                   
                 redevelopment efforts. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Inventory and categorization of most common systems has been developed to 
               
               
                   
                 determine reusability. Secondary applications have not been inventoried and may 
               
               
                   
                 be susceptible to conflicting development efforts. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Inventory and categorization of all systems is referenced to determine 
               
               
                   
                 reusability and impacts. Often includes pre-planning plan to accommodate high 
               
               
                   
                 priority maintenance requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe your organization&#39;s current operations regarding systems 
               
               
                   
                 integration and development efforts? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Continued maintenance of legacy, systems is supported to keep the business 
               
               
                   
                 running “as-is.” 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Use of interim solutions such as middleware, GUI front ends and many 
               
               
                   
                 patchwork interfaces to legacy environments, which management views as 
               
               
                   
                 adequate for the time being. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is a transitional approach to phased shutdowns of legacy systems, data 
               
               
                   
                 structure migration and implementation of radically different technical environments. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the criteria used in the decision making 
               
               
                   
                 process for systems development and integration. 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Decisions are frequently based on customer/market demand and/or qualitative 
               
               
                   
                 perception of business need. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Decisions are based on stand alone business case and/or cost/benefit analysis 
               
               
                   
                 with no overall consideration for other business objectives. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Decisions are based on overall business strategy and requirements and 
               
               
                   
                 systems needed to meet business objectives. 
               
               
                 Requirements 
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s methodology for gathering 
               
               
                 Management 
                 systems integration requirements? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is no formal, documented requirements gathering methodology or if there 
               
               
                   
                 is a methodology, it is not enforced or followed. Stakeholders not included in the 
               
               
                   
                 requirements process or are involved too late. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There is a solid requirements gathering methodology to elicit requirements, 
               
               
                   
                 manage changes and trace-ability, and validate the requirements. Methodology is 
               
               
                   
                 adhered to in most cases. Stakeholders are included in the requirements gathering 
               
               
                   
                 process. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is a formal requirements gathering methodology in place and enforced. 
               
               
                   
                 Stakeholders are included in the requirements gathering, validation, and change 
               
               
                   
                 management process. 
               
               
                   
                 How does your organization track changes to (Systems Integration) requirements 
               
               
                   
                 documents? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is inconsistent requirements storage, maintenance and versioning. There 
               
               
                   
                 is no ability to analyze changes in requirements over time, lack of requirements 
               
               
                   
                 standards, and no use of best practices. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Change control process is in place and integrated with requirement versioning. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Centralized requirement storage and versioning systems in place. There is 
               
               
                   
                 also the ability to track changes to versions and manage change control process. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the skill sets and the people who develop and 
               
               
                   
                 manage (Systems Integration) requirements documentation and processes? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Resources have basic training on requirements gathering/methodology. 
               
               
                   
                 Resources have no formal team managing the requirements documentation or 
               
               
                   
                 process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There is a specialized requirements team in place but there is no formal training 
               
               
                   
                 process in place to ensure that a standard methodology and best practices are 
               
               
                   
                 used. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There is a specialized team in place to capture business requirements. This 
               
               
                   
                 team is trained on methodology, standards, and best practices. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the testing process before a new (Systems 
               
               
                   
                 Integration) development project is launched into production? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Test cases are generated for testing but not necessarily linked to requirements. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Test cases are generated that specifically test compliance with requirements 
               
               
                   
                 documents, however inconsistent tracking between requirements and test case 
               
               
                   
                 results occur. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Test cases are generated that specifically test compliance with requirements 
               
               
                   
                 documents and also ensure system functionality meets business needs. Metrics are 
               
               
                   
                 in place to quantify defects and change process is in place to fix defects quickly. 
               
               
                 Implementation 
                 Which statement best describes the checks and balances in place prior to starting 
               
               
                 Support 
                 the implementation process? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Control and audits are reviewed on an exception basis and are not designed into 
               
               
                   
                 the implementation process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Major controls in place but are not consistent across all business functions (e.g. 
               
               
                   
                 looking at financial controls, but not capacity). 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Controls and audits are designed into the turnover process, including review of 
               
               
                   
                 systems, capacity, and financial controls. Each group reviews the appropriate audit 
               
               
                   
                 and controls. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the communication level during the 
               
               
                   
                 implementation phase of a Systems Integration? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Communications to stakeholders is not timely, accurate and consistent. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Communication to stakeholders is usually timely, accurate and consistent. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Communication to stakeholders is always timely accurate and consistent. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the levels of documentation used during the 
               
               
                   
                 implementation phase of a Systems Integration? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Documentation is not complete for user and/or and there is no catalog for 
               
               
                   
                 updates to documentation or process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Documentation is created but not cataloged to enable stakeholder access and 
               
               
                   
                 there is no process to maintain documentation as changes occur. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Documentation is created and is cataloged and viewable to all stakeholders. 
               
               
                   
                 Processes exist to update documentation as changes occur. 
               
               
                   
                 If a Systems Integration project involves converting from one system to another, 
               
               
                   
                 which of the following best describes how your organization handles the system 
               
               
                   
                 conversion? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Manual conversion process is in place, but there is no process used to manage 
               
               
                   
                 exceptions. There is a lack of conversion audit reports and controls. Data integrity 
               
               
                   
                 issues are often identified in the production environment following conversion. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Conversion process is tested thoroughly and reports are produced to identify 
               
               
                   
                 exceptions. All testing exceptions are addressed, but no process exists to fix 
               
               
                   
                 conversion exceptions found during the production run. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Conversion process is thoroughly tested and data is validated. Any exceptions 
               
               
                   
                 are addressed during the testing process. Production conversion uses automated 
               
               
                   
                 exceptions process to catalog and manage bad data. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the level of prework and preparation made to 
               
               
                   
                 your organization&#39;s technical and network components prior to Systems 
               
               
                   
                 Integration? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - System and network components are ready for implementation just in time with 
               
               
                   
                 little system testing occurring within the production environments. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Full testing of all systems and network components happen in production-like 
               
               
                   
                 environment but there is no full integration testing to ensure all components work 
               
               
                   
                 together. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Full testing has been performed on an integrated systems with full stress test 
               
               
                   
                 using systems and volumes that mirror production. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes production support&#39;s (systems help desk) 
               
               
                   
                 level of involvement during systems implementations? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Production support is not engaged in the implementation process throughout 
               
               
                   
                 the lifecycle, leading to lack of standards and missed steps during the 
               
               
                   
                 implementation process. No single group is designated to run the implementation. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Production support is engaged in the implementation process, but standards 
               
               
                   
                 may not be followed to ensure ongoing support. The implementation team is 
               
               
                   
                 disjointed with lack of oversight over all areas. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Production support team has undergone training and is fully ready to manage 
               
               
                   
                 the system using applicable standards. An Implementation manager is in place to 
               
               
                   
                 coordinate the implementation and ongoing communications in order to address 
               
               
                   
                 any problems to prevent delays. 
               
               
                 Program/Project 
                 Which of the following best describes program/project management within systems 
               
               
                 Management 
                 integration development departments? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There is little program management and coordination. Individuals or 
               
               
                   
                 independent teams may be tasked to project manage but have inconsistent project 
               
               
                   
                 management skill sets. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Informal program management functions occurs for more complex projects 
               
               
                   
                 and/or releases. Standard project management tool sets are used to track and 
               
               
                   
                 manage projects. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Formalized program management groups coordinates activities for multi-phase 
               
               
                   
                 projects and all integrated releases. PMI (Project Management Institute) or other 
               
               
                   
                 standard certification qualifications for project managers including robust process, 
               
               
                   
                 toolset and standardized training. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the level of (program management) planning 
               
               
                   
                 that goes into systems integration and development? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - There are individual, high-level project plans created as a guide but contain 
               
               
                   
                 minimal milestones. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - There are standardized project plan templates which include standard 
               
               
                   
                 milestones and work breakdown schedules. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - There are standard project plans with milestones and schedules which integrate 
               
               
                   
                 to master program plan that highlights dependant projects to ensure maximum 
               
               
                   
                 coordination. 
               
               
                   
                 How are program management related changes handled during systems integration 
               
               
                   
                 or development? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No formal change control process for program management. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Changes to the scope, schedule and/or budget are approved by project 
               
               
                   
                 manager. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Changes to scope, schedule and/or budget are identified, documented, and 
               
               
                   
                 estimated for impact before approval by program management and or change 
               
               
                   
                 control board. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are projects tracked during systems integration and development? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Inconsistent or irregular status reporting outside of project plan. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Status reporting through milestone and/or percentage completion. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Proper execution and control of the project baseline ensured through cost and 
               
               
                   
                 schedule tracking through earned value analysis, communications tracking, issue 
               
               
                   
                 and action item tracking, regular status reporting, and phase containment. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent are “lessons learned” captured as a part of systems integration and 
               
               
                   
                 development? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - No lessons learned review. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Project managers identify lessons learned and incorporate them into their own 
               
               
                   
                 future projects. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Formalized review lessons learned from individual projects and across overall 
               
               
                   
                 prograrn(s) are integrated into development standards, future project management. 
               
               
                 Quality 
                 Which of the following best describes your organization&#39;s software Quality 
               
               
                 Assurance 
                 Assurance team? 
               
               
                 Management 
                 1 - QA team reports under lower-level manager of other IT disciplines and does not 
               
               
                   
                 have authority or autonomy to enforce practices. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Established quality assurance organization, but does not have full authority and 
               
               
                   
                 autonomy to enforce practices. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Established quality assurance organization with authority and autonomy to 
               
               
                   
                 enforce Quality Assurance. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the current state of your company&#39;s testing 
               
               
                   
                 methodology? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Testing methodology is not clearly defined, documented or communicated, 
               
               
                   
                 insufficient time is allocated to testing. Quality checks are conducted upon release. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Testing methodology allows some time for review, and test coverage is based 
               
               
                   
                 on entrance/exit criteria, which may not be complete. Test time may be reduced as 
               
               
                   
                 schedule slips and quality checks are infrequent or at the end of the schedule. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Testing methodology defines a test strategy using technical requirements to 
               
               
                   
                 support quality checks throughout the development lifecycle for timely risk 
               
               
                   
                 assessment. Sufficient test time is scheduled. 
               
               
                   
                 Which best describes the level of completeness for Quality Assurance (testing) 
               
               
                   
                 requirements? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Requirements are incorrect, vague, incomplete, not fully documented and not 
               
               
                   
                 fully testable. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Complete and testable requirements are developed and documented, but are 
               
               
                   
                 not frozen at a defined point in time. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Clear, complete, accurate, attainable, testable and measurable requirements are 
               
               
                   
                 developed documented approved and frozen by all team members. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the management of test cases? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Test cases may be developed and documented, but there is no ability to link test 
               
               
                   
                 cases back to individual requirements. Tracking typically does not exist. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Test cases are documented and tracked manually, facilitating an unstructured 
               
               
                   
                 approach to creating, tracking and managing test cases, requirements and results. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - An integrated test case management tool is used for facilitating a structured 
               
               
                   
                 approach to creating, tracking and managing test cases, requirements, and results. 
               
               
                   
                 To what extent does your company&#39;s Quality Assurance testing environment 
               
               
                   
                 simulate the production environment? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Environment does not simulate production and testing and planning is mostly 
               
               
                   
                 manual. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Test environment simulates production and test tools support concurrent 
               
               
                   
                 completion of tasks to minimize redundancy. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Test environment mirrors production environment and automated test tools are 
               
               
                   
                 used to provide comprehensive test coverage throughout development and 
               
               
                   
                 production. 
               
               
                 Maintenance 
                 Which of the following best describe the level of documentation created to support a 
               
               
                 and 
                 newly integrated system&#39;s maintenance and ongoing operations? 
               
               
                 Operations 
                 1 - System operations documentation (Ops procedures, data flow, network and 
               
               
                 Support 
                 system topology) is not complete or it has not been created. There is no 
               
               
                   
                 centralized repository of existing documentation or process in place to ensure 
               
               
                   
                 updates are made. The support workflow is not documented nor understood. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Systems operations documentation is developed and cataloged, however there 
               
               
                   
                 is no process in place to maintain ongoing changes. The support workflow is not 
               
               
                   
                 well understood. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Systems operations and documentation have been developed and are 
               
               
                   
                 cataloged in a centralized repository for access to all parties. Documentation is 
               
               
                   
                 maintained as changes occur. Support workflow is well known. 
               
               
                   
                 Which of the following best describes the post-release transition from development 
               
               
                   
                 to operational support? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Development and maintenance teams are the same group or verbal hand off 
               
               
                   
                 occurs from one team to the other with minimal training and documentations. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Transition occurs with sufficient training and coordination. Operations team is 
               
               
                   
                 trained on incident and change practices. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Transition from development team to operations support team occurs with 
               
               
                   
                 sufficient training and coordination. Operations team is fully trained on incident and 
               
               
                   
                 change policies. Development team continues to work with Ops team to fix defects 
               
               
                   
                 for several weeks following launch to production. 
               
               
                   
                 How are ongoing systems changes for integrated systems managed within your 
               
               
                   
                 organization? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Changes are made to the system in an ad hoc manner without proper controls, 
               
               
                   
                 tracking, or communication to stakeholders. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Changes are tracked, communicated and implemented through formal release 
               
               
                   
                 process to minimize risk. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - All changes are tracked, and communicated through controlled processes that 
               
               
                   
                 provides coordination and communication with all stakeholders while allowing  
               
               
                   
                 timely implementation of changes via maintenance windows as well as releases. 
               
               
                   
                 Which statement best describes the backup and recovery measures your 
               
               
                   
                 organization has in place for integrated systems? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Back ups occur but there is no formal process to catalog and manage recovery, 
               
               
                   
                 resulting in significant delays to the recovery process. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - All critical data and systems components are backed up based on business 
               
               
                   
                 criticality. Back-ups are not cataloged and documented in order to recover in real 
               
               
                   
                 time, requiring time to locate back-ups and complete the restore process. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - All critical data and systems components are backed up based on business 
               
               
                   
                 criticality. Program libraries are maintained and data is stored offsite with 
               
               
                   
                 automation in place to identify and back up data. Version control system is used to 
               
               
                   
                 maintain data integrity. 
               
               
                   
                 How would you describe the (fail-over) redundancy of your newly integrated 
               
               
                   
                 applications? 
               
               
                   
                 1 - Applications run on a single server and if server is down, the application is 
               
               
                   
                 down. 
               
               
                   
                 3 - Applications run on a clustered environment and have local fail-over 
               
               
                   
                 redundancy, but no proactive monitoring. 
               
               
                   
                 5 - Applications run on a clustered environment and have local fail-over 
               
               
                   
                 redundancy. There is proactive server and network monitoring to notify support 
               
               
                   
                 team of potential or real failures. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
     Of course, it should be understood that the organization set forth in tables 8-11, as well as the questions and exemplars set forth therein, are intended to be illustrative only of a particular type of organization which could be used in an implementation of certain aspects of the teachings of this application, and should not be treated as limiting on claims included in this application or which claim priority from this application. When the response interface shown in  FIG. 3   b  is presented to the user, in addition to questions [ 301 ][ 302 ][ 303 ] the user is also provided with exemplars [ 304 ] which, in the exemplary implementation, are statements used to assign meaning to the numeric scores chosen by the SME for each question. As will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art, the exemplars could correspond directly to the exemplars set forth above in tables 8-11. Thus, in some implementations, there could be a direct correspondence between data stored in a manner shown in tables 8-11, with SMEs presented with those questions taken from rows of attributes relevant to the capabilities within the identified subject matter expertise. Once the SMEs have completed the questions presented to them the data would be stored at the server [ 201 ] for subsequent use in prioritizing capability enhancements. 
     It should be understood that the discussion above, which describes survey distribution in the context of a browser based survey tool accessed through remote computers [ 203 ][ 204 ][ 205 ] and driven by a server [ 201 ] is intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting on the potential computerized techniques for collecting raw data [ 104 ]. Variations on the described techniques are also possible. For example, instead of utilizing a browser-based survey tool driven by a server [ 201 ], raw data might be collected using survey applications which are locally stored on individual computers used by SMEs. The SMEs could take the surveys using the locally stored survey applications, and those applications would transfer the data to a central data warehouse for subsequent analysis. As yet another alternative, the SMEs could take the surveys using survey applications stored on local computers, and store the data collected in those surveys locally, with the data being collected when (and if) it is required in later analysis. Similarly, the response interface of  FIG. 3   b , and the capability selection screens of  FIGS. 3   a  and  3   a - 1  are also intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting. Other capability selection screens, such as those shown in  FIGS. 3   c  and  3   c - 1 , or other response interfaces, such as that shown in  FIG. 3   d  could also be implemented by one of ordinary skill in the art in light of this disclosure. Particular implementations of capability selection screens and response interfaces can be determined based on the specifics of a situation. For example, in some situations, the response interfaces could be designed with a high contrast between text and background, which could be intended to increase readability. Similarly, in some situations (e.g., where individuals might decide whether to purchase products or services based on the prioritization of capability enhancements), there might be specific background colors (e.g., blues and chromatic colors as shown in  FIGS. 3   c ,  3   c - 1  and  3   d ) chosen to improve the aesthetic quality of the interfaces. As another example, in some situations, it might be preferable to have interfaces which include information, such as instructions or explanation, as shown in  FIGS. 3   a  and  3   a - 1 . Additional variations, and combinations of the above listed techniques are also possible. Of course, these alternatives are not intended to be limiting, and are instead intended to illustrate that a broad variety of techniques can be used for collecting raw data [ 104 ], even within the narrow subset of raw data collection techniques which utilize computerized surveys. 
     Of course, it should be understood that the questions presented to an SME might not include the organization set forth above. For example, turning to  FIG. 5 , consider a scenario in which questions are stored as elements in a contiguous section [ 502 ] of a database [ 501 ] according to their content. To determine the order in which questions should be presented to an SME, the data from the contiguous memory [ 502 ] could be stored in an n element data array [ 507 ], with each element in the data array representing a single question. An n element mapping array [ 503 ] could then be used as a key for transforming the n element data array [ 507 ] into an n element presentation array [ 505 ]. The n element mapping array [ 503 ] might be populated by a randomizer function [ 504 ], an exemplary code snippet for which is set forth in  FIG. 5 . Once the n element data array [ 507 ] has been transformed into the n element presentation array [ 505 ] questions can be presented on a screen [ 506 ] in the order indicated by the n element presentation array [ 505 ]. In such an organization, each user of the survey might be presented with the questions in a different order, thereby minimizing the potential that the survey results will be skewed by the order in which the data is collected. Once the users have completed their surveys, the n element mapping array [ 503 ] for a user could be used to coordinate the user&#39;s answers with the underlying questions. 
     Of course, it should be understood that discussion of the database, randomization, mapping and data collection described above is intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting on the scope of claims included in this application, or which are filed subsequently claiming the benefit of this application. As examples of variations which could be made from the description above, the database might be a relational database with data stored in tables (e.g., tables of the type shown in tables 8-11) rather than organized in terms of continuous memory segments as described above. Similarly, different randomizer functions could be used, or the randomizer function could be replaced with some other type of mapping (e.g., a predefined hash table), or the questions could be presented in a manner which reflects their organization, as opposed to being randomized. Additionally, data collection might include not only collection of data regarding the organization&#39;s customer care capabilities, but might also include data collection regarding the individuals who are providing the data. For example, in the case of computer driven survey techniques, the individuals taking the surveys might be asked to answer questions such as their years of experience working for the organization and/or their years of experience working in the industry. Thus, the discussion above should be understood as illustrative only, and not limiting. 
     Returning to  FIG. 1 , the second sub-step in the secondary data collection [ 103 ] is to collect normalizing data [ 105 ], which should be understood to refer to the process of collecting data which is used in combination with the raw data, for example to provide context and/or verification. As was the case with the collection of raw data [ 104 ], the collection of normalizing data [ 105 ] can also utilize a variety of techniques. For example, in an implementation in which a consultant is involved in the collection of normalizing data [ 105 ], the consultant might collect that data through interviews, for example with subject matter experts, with focus groups, or both. Those interviews could be used to gather anecdotal data which is relevant to the same subject matter which is the focus of the raw data collection [ 104 ]. Alternatively, or in addition to the collection of interview data, the consultant might visit an organization&#39;s customer care facilities, to learn by direct observation what capabilities the organization has in place. The data gathered through interviews and/or observations could then be compiled by the consultant by taking the same surveys which were used to collect the raw data [ 104 ]. The data obtained through the collection of normalizing data [ 105 ] could then be compared with the data obtained through the collection of raw data [ 104 ]. If the normalizing data and the raw data diverged, then the steps of collecting raw data [ 104 ] and collecting normalizing data [ 105 ] could be repeated (e.g., by distributing surveys to different SMEs, by the consultant taking more observations and conducting more interviews, etc) until the divergence is eliminated or sufficient data is gathered to explain the divergence, thereby ensuring that the data used for prioritizing capability enhancements is valid. 
     Of course, it should be understood that the discussion above of certain techniques which could be used in the collection of normalizing data [ 105 ] is intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting. For example, in some implementations, the normalizing data might be obtained, rather than by using a consultant, by issuing additional surveys of the type used in the collection of raw data [ 104 ] (e.g., surveys could be issued to lower level employees, to ensure that the perspectives of upper and middle management were in agreement). The data obtained through the separate surveys might then be compared for validation. The uses and relationship of the data collected in the sub-steps of the secondary data collection [ 103 ] could also vary from the description above. For example, in some scenarios, rather than validating the raw data using the normalizing data, the normalizing data might simply be stored for use in later data analysis. This type of procedure, which omits the validation described above, might be appropriate in situations in which an organization wishes to prioritize capability enhancements, but wishes to minimize the time spent in arriving at the prioritization. As an example of an additional variation, in some embodiments, instead of utilizing the raw data for prioritizing the capability enhancements, while the normalizing data is used for validation or contextualization of the raw data, both the raw data and the normalizing data could be used for prioritizing capability enhancements (e.g., if the raw data collection [ 104 ] and the normalizing data collection [ 105 ] both comprise the step of collecting data using surveys, the results of those surveys could be combined and the combined results used for prioritizing capability enhancements. Additional variations on the above discussion are also possible, and could be implemented by those of ordinary skill in the art without undue experimentation in light of this disclosure. Therefore, the discussion above regarding the secondary data collection [ 103 ], and the sub-steps thereof ([ 104 ][ 105 ]), should be understood as illustrative only, and not limiting. 
     Continuing with the discussion of  FIG. 1 , as shown in that figure, after the secondary data collection [ 103 ], the process continues with derivation of capability scores [ 106 ]. Like the secondary data collection [ 103 ], the derivation of capability scores [ 106 ] comprises two sub-steps, the derivation of worst case scores [ 107 ], and the derivation of realistic scores [ 108 ]. For the purpose of clarity, those sub-steps are discussed separately below. 
     Turning now to the sub-step of deriving worst case scores [ 107 ], that sub-step refers to the process of deriving scores for each capability which show how much impact would be achieved for each goal and complexity lever identified in the initial data collection [ 101 ] if that capability were to move from a minimum to a maximum level (e.g., from a 1 to a 5, if capabilities are measured on a 1 to 5 scale). Various techniques could be used to derive the worst case scores. For example, the derivation of worst case scores [ 107 ] might take place using a database which includes information defining how much impact an improvement in a particular capability is likely to have. Such a database might have a variety of organizations. For example, it could be a relational database in which capabilities are associated with goals and complexity levers through tables, though other styles of organization, such as object oriented databases, could also be utilized. Further, in implementations which utilize a database for deriving worst case scores [ 107 ], the various scores might be identified in terms of industries, as well as in terms of capabilities. For instance, in some implementations there might be separate worst case scores for industries such as groceries, wireless, retail sales, which could reflect specific characteristics of those industries which could affect the mappings (e.g., improvements in technology architecture for an organization in the grocery industry might be given a lower impact or complexity worst case score than improvements in technology architecture for an organization in the wireless industry to reflect the differing technology requirements of grocers and wireless carriers). 
     However, deriving worst case scores [ 107 ] is not limited to database-centric techniques. A non-database centric technique which could be used to derive worst case scores [ 107 ] is to compare the characteristics of a capability with the particular goals and complexity levers identified as being applicable for an organization. For example, if an organization has a goal of improving data analysis, the capability of business intelligence might be given a high worst case score for that goal, because improving the use of customer interaction data to determine the health and effectiveness of an enterprise through the eyes of the customer would likely have a substantial positive effect on the organization&#39;s data analysis. By contrast, the capability of talent rewards and retention would likely be given a low worst case score for the goal of improving data analysis, because aligning salary, benefits, rewards and recognition to customer, market, and resource requirements would likely have only a small or nonexistent effect on the goal of improving data analysis. Of course, combined techniques are also possible. For example, use of information stored in a database might be combined with comparison of the characteristics of capabilities with goals and complexity levers. Alternatively, or in addition to the above, scores in a database could be modified for particular organizations based on the information gathered in the secondary data collection [ 103 ]. Further, one technique might be used to transition to another. For example, the comparison of capability features to goals and complexity levers could be used to build a database which would then be used for obtaining worst case scores. Thus, it should be understood that the techniques set forth herein are intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting on the scope of the claims included in this application, or in other applications which claim the benefit of this application. 
     The second sub-step in the derivation of capability scores [ 106 ] is the derivation of realistic scores [ 108 ]. This sub-step [ 108 ] refers to the process of obtaining scores which reflect the impact on each goal and complexity lever of moving a capability from an organization&#39;s current practices to a best practices level. As an example of how such a score might be derived, consider the scenario in which raw data collection [ 104 ] takes place by gathering computerized survey data asking SMEs to respond with a ranking of between 1 and 5 to a variety of questions regarding customer care capabilities. Initially, that data can be used to derive a capability score, that is, a score which represents the organization&#39;s current practices in the particular capability. Such a capability score could be derived from a process such as averaging of the responses given by the SMEs. Alternatively, in an implementation in which questions are associated with individual attributes, the scores could first be assembled into sub-scores for attributes, then the attribute sub-scores could be averaged. As yet another alternative, the normalizing data could be used to weigh the scores for certain attributes (e.g., those attributes where the normalizing data agrees with the raw data). Of course, these alternative calculation methods are provided to demonstrate that the capability score could be derived using a broad variety of techniques, and is not limited to derivation through any particular calculation. 
     Once the capability score has been derived, the next step is to derive a score representing the distance between the organization&#39;s current practices, and the organization&#39;s goal (e.g., best practices level). This score, referred to for the sake of convenience as a capability rank variance, can also be calculated in a number of manners. For example, the capability rank variance could be calculated by taking the capability score for a particular capability, and subtracting that score from a score representing the organization&#39;s goal (e.g., best practices). For example, using this method of calculation, if an organization has a capability score of 2.19 in a particular capability, and the best practices level for that organization is defined as a 3, then the organization&#39;s capability rank variance for that capability would be equal to 3-2.19=0.81. As a second example of how a capability rank variance could be calculated, it is possible that, for some capabilities, the real “distance” (e.g., in terms of difficulty in implementation, or expected benefits achieved from making a step increase) between steps might not be constant. For example, in a scenario in which capabilities are ranked on a one to three scale, with scores of one representing baseline practices, scores of two representing industry parity practices, and scores of three representing industry best practices, the expected benefit of moving from a one to a two might be different from the expected benefit of moving from a two to a three. Thus, it is possible that the capability rank variance might be calculated using an expected benefits curve, wherein the capability rank variance could be calculated by taking a definite integral of the expected benefits curve between the organization&#39;s current practices and the organization&#39;s goal practices. As a third example of how a capability rank variance could be calculated, it is possible that, as part of calculating the capability rank variance, the scale used for measuring the capability score could be modified. For example, an organization might have calculated a score for a particular capability by collecting data on a one to five scale. However, calculating the capability rank variance, the scale used to measure the rank might be transformed from a one to five scale, to an alternative scale, for example, a one to three scale, to reflect the fact that the organization being evaluated might be in an industry where a practice level of five would be unnecessary and/or unhelpful (e.g., a particular practice might require supporting infrastructure which would be an unnecessary cost or distraction for the business). Thus, by refining the scale used for the capability score, the capability rank variance might be reduced from a relatively high number (e.g., 5−2.8=2.2) to a relatively low number (e.g., 3−2.8=0.2). Of course, as stated previously, the discussion of these alternate techniques is intended to show that the calculation of the capability rank variance is not restricted to one particular technique or set of equations, and that a variety of equations might be used, as would be appropriate for a particular scenario. 
     After a capability rank variance for a capability has been determined, to determine a realistic score for the capability, a determination is made as to the effect which dropping the capability rank variance to zero would have on a goal for the organization. As set forth previously, the potential improvement which could take place for each goal from moving a capability from a minimum to a maximum level was identified as the worst case score for that capability. Using the worst case score, it is possible to determine the impact which will take place if an organization moves from its current practices in a capability to its goal in that capability, by finding a conversion formula between the scale used to measure the organization&#39;s practices and the scale used to measure the worst case score. One method of making this conversion is to find the value of each step for an improvement in the capability by taking the maximum value possible in the scale used to measure the capability score, then dividing that value by the number of steps in that scale. For example, if the capability score is measured on a one to three scale, then the maximum value for that scale would be three, while the minimum value for that scale would be one. Thus, the value for each step on the scale would be (3/(3−1))=3/2=1.5 units. Once the value for each step in the scale used to measure the capability score had been determined, that scale can be converted into the scale used to measure the worst case scores. A similar technique can be used for that conversion. For instance, the value for each step on the scale used to measure the capability score can be multiplied by the ratio of the worst case score as determined for a particular capability or goal to the maximum possible score on the worst case scale. Thus, to continue the previous example, assume that a particular capability has been assigned a worst case score for a particular goal of two on a zero to five scale. In such a scenario, it would be possible to convert between the scale used to measure the capability score to the scale used to measure the worst case scores by multiplying the value of each step on the capability score scale (1.5) with the ratio of the actual and maximum worst case scores (2/5=0.4). The resulting value (0.6) could then be multiplied by the capability rank variance (0.81) to determine a realistic score for that capability and goal (i.e., 0.81*0.6=0.486). The same process would then be performed for each goal and complexity lever for each capability, yielding a realistic score for each capability relative to each goal and complexity lever. 
     Of course, it should be understood that the explanation and equations used above are intended to be illustrative only, and not limiting on the scope of claims included in this application, or included in other applications which claim the benefit of this application. There are a wide variety of techniques contemplated which could be used in addition to, or as substitutes for, the techniques described above. For example, while the above discussion focused on determining realistic scores by converting between scales used to measure an organization&#39;s practices and scales use to measure worst case scores using a constant ratio of step values, it is also possible that more complicated, or different, formulae for obtaining realistic scores could be used. Such techniques might be used based on a judgment that the impact and difficulty associated with modifying an organization&#39;s practices might vary depending on the organization&#39;s current level. For instance, the value of distances between steps in the scale used to measure an organization&#39;s practices might be determined using an expected benefits or an expected complexity function, which could be defined in a manner which expresses the different values between steps (e.g., an upward sloping expected complexity function could represent a judgment that it would be harder to move from industry standard practices to best practices than it would be to move from lagging practices to industry standard practices). Similarly, while the conversion between the scale used to measure an organization&#39;s practices and the scale used to measure worst case scores could be performed in the same manner for each capability and worst case score, in some implementations, the conversion could be made by using individual formulae for each capability or each goal or complexity lever (or both) (e.g., a capability could have an upward sloping expected complexity function for one complexity lever, and a downward sloping expected benefits function for one goal, etc.). Combinations of these techniques could also be used. Thus, it is expected that those of ordinary skill in the art will easily be able to implement the techniques discussed above, as well as others which might be appropriate for particular situations without undue experimentation in light of this disclosure. 
     Returning to the diagram of  FIG. 1 , regardless of the particular technique(s) used, after the derivation of capability scores [ 106 ], the process depicted in that figure continues with the prioritization of capability enhancements [ 109 ]. This prioritization could be performed by utilizing the realistic scores for each capability relative to the goals and complexity levers identified for the organization to identify which capability enhancements would result in the greatest benefit at the lowest relative expenditure of effort and/or resources. For the purpose of clarity, the discussion of prioritizing capability enhancements [ 109 ] assumes that the prioritization will be made on a two dimensional basis, with enhancements to each capability being provided with an overall impact score, and an overall complexity score. The overall impact score would represent the overall impact of bringing a particular capability from its current level to a best practices level, given the goals which are identified as meaningful for a particular organization. The overall complexity score would represent the overall difficulty which bringing a capability from its current level to an organization&#39;s goal level would likely have. One method which could be used for calculating those scores is to, for each capability, take each realistic score for each goal and complexity lever for that capability and multiply that score by the weight assigned to the appropriate goal or complexity lever. The resulting products for each goal and complexity lever would then be summed to obtain the overall complexity or impact score for the capability. 
     To put the above discussion in concrete terms, and connect it with the previous discussion of deriving capability scores [ 106 ], the following equation could be used to determine an overall impact score for a particular capability: 
             O   =       ∑     i   =   1     n     ⁢           ⁢     (       W   i     *     I   i     *     (       C   var     *       (       S   max     /     (       S   max     -     S   min       )       )     /     I   range         )       )             
Equation 1
 
where O stands for the overall impact score, n stands for the number of identified goals for the organization, W i  stands for the weight assigned to the i th  goal, I i  stands for the worst case score assigned to the capability for the i th  goal identified for the organization, C var  stands for the capability rank variance for the particular capability, S max  stands for the scale maximum value used to measure the capability score, S min  stands for the scale minimum value used to measure the capability score, and I range  stands for the maximum value of the range used when determining the worst case score for that capability. Similarly, the same formula could be used to obtain the overall complexity score, though the variables in the formula would have different meanings. For example, in modifying the above equation for derivation of an overall complexity score, O would refer to the overall complexity score, n would stand for the number of complexity levers identified as applicable to the organization, W i  would stand for the weight assigned to the i th  complexity lever, I i  would stand for the complexity impact assigned to the capability for the i th  complexity lever, C var  would refer to the capability rank variance for the capability as relevant for measuring the impact on a complexity lever, S max  would stand for the scale maximum value used to measure the capability score for that complexity lever, S min  would stand for the scale minimum value used to measure the capability score for that complexity lever, and I range  would stand for the maximum value of the range used when determining the worst case score for that capability.
 
     Of course, it should be understood that, while discussion of the equations for determining overall complexity scores and overall impact scores proceeded with the assumption that variables represented with the same symbols could have different values between equations, it is also possible that one or more of the variables might have the same values. For example, C var  as used in the equation for the overall impact score could be the same number as used for C var  in the equation for the overall complexity score. Similarly, it is possible that other variables could have the same values as well. For example, it might be the case that the same number of goals and complexity levers were identified for an organization (leading to the value for n in the two equations to be the same), that the scales used to measure the capability score in terms of complexity levers and goals is the same (leading to S max  and S min  being the same between the two equations) and that the same range of values was used for the worst case scores for both goals and complexity levers (leading I range  to be the same across the above equations). Thus, it should be understood that the calculation of overall scores for goals and complexity levers is not limited to techniques using divergent equations, and that techniques using the same equations could be substituted as well. 
     Continuing with the discussion above, after overall impact and complexity scores have been determined, the prioritization of capability enhancements [ 109 ] could continue with the placement of the capability enhancements on a two dimensional scale, with their coordinates controlled by the overall scores discussed above. For example,  FIG. 6  depicts a graph in which enhancements to the capabilities of talent acquisition, talent training, retention, workforce management, service delivery, and intelligence have been placed in context with one another in a manner which depicts the relative difficulties and expected impacts of enhancements to those capabilities. Thus, in the graph depicted in  FIG. 6 , the greater the overall impact score for a particular capability, the farther to the right that capability will be depicted. Similarly, the greater the overall complexity score for a capability, the farther up on the graph that capability will be depicted. Of course, it is also possible that, instead prioritizing capability enhancements [ 109 ] using a two dimensional scale, the step of prioritizing capability enhancements could be prioritized on a one dimensional scale as well. For example, using the data collected for the particular capabilities, a one dimensional scale based on expected return on investment for investments in that capability could be created. As yet another alternative, a scale having more than two dimensions could be presented. For example, there might be a four dimensional scale in which capability enhancements are measured in terms of expected monetary cost, expected time to implementation, expected increases in customer satisfaction, and expected reductions in operating costs. Other scales could also be used. 
     It should also be understood that various types of tools could additionally be used in the prioritization of capability enhancements [ 109 ]. For example, the prioritization could be accomplished through the use of data structures such as the pivot table linked spreadsheets such as are depicted in  FIGS. 4   a - 1  to  4   e - 2  (when reviewing those figures, it should be noted that the individual spreadsheets have been split into complimentary portions. Thus,  FIGS. 4   a - 1  and  4   a - 2  actually represent one spreadsheet, which can be obtained by combining those figures. The other figures (i.e.,  4   b - 1  and  4   b - 2 ,  4   c - 1  and  4   c - 2 ,  4   d - 1  and  4   d - 2  and  4   e - 1  and  4   e - 2 ) can be combined similarly). In some implementations which use such spreadsheets or other similar data structures, the data structures might be linked to the tools used in the secondary data collection [ 103 ] in such a manner that some or all of the data could be populated automatically. For example, if the secondary data collection [ 103 ] used a computerized survey tool for the collection of raw data [ 104 ], the data gathered by the computerized survey tool could be automatically uploaded into the spreadsheets. Additionally, the spreadsheets themselves might be populated with formulae (e.g., equation 1) for prioritizing the capability enhancements. Of course, it should be understood that the depiction of the spreadsheets in  FIGS. 4   a - 1  to  4   e - 2  is not intended to be limiting, and that other tools could similarly be used by those of ordinary skill in the art without undue experimentation in light of this disclosure. 
     Finally, in the process of  FIG. 1 , after the capability enhancements have been prioritized [ 109 ], the results of the process are presented [ 110 ]. This presentation process can take a number of forms. For example, in a scenario in which the process of  FIG. 1  is performed by a consultant, the presentation of results [ 110 ] might consist of the consultant providing a report on the organization, accompanied by a slide show or other type of presentation explaining the results. The report on the organization could consist of simply the prioritization for enhancements to each capability as set forth above, or it could include other information, such as a diagram depicting the organization&#39;s capabilities relative to their industry&#39;s standard, as shown in  FIG. 7 . If the report is accompanied by a presentation, the presentation could explain what the industry standards mean, and might also explain the data which was collected. For example, in a scenario in which the secondary data collection [ 103 ] included both the steps of collecting raw data [ 104 ] and collecting normalizing data [ 105 ], the presentation could explain any discrepancies between the raw data and the normalizing data (e.g., if the SMEs rated the company at a high level, while a consultant rated the company at a low level, this discrepancy might be pointed out during the presentation, and the consultant might explain why he or she believes that the rating provided by the SMEs was incorrect). Of course, it is also possible that the presentation of results [ 110 ] might not include a presentation by a consultant. For example, the results might be presented by simply providing a report to the organization which was evaluated, which report might or might not be accompanied by an executive summary of the findings contained therein. 
     As set forth above,  FIG. 1  presents an illustrative process which can be used in the prioritization and presentation of capability enhancements. It should be understood that  FIG. 1  is not intended to imply that all claims in this application, or other applications claiming the benefit of this applications are directed to processes for the prioritization and presentation of capability enhancements. Similarly, it should be understood that the discussion of  FIG. 1  is intended to be illustrative only of a process for prioritizing and presenting capability enhancements, and that divergences from that process will be immediately apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art. One example of a divergence which was explicitly presented was the combination of the initial data collection [ 101 ] and the weighing of goals and complexity levers [ 102 ]. However, other divergences are also possible. For example, while not depicted in  FIG. 1 , a process for prioritizing and presenting capability enhancements could also include a step of analyzing collected data. Such a step might include, for instance, assembling the data obtained through the secondary data collection [ 103 ] in a central data warehouse, where it could be stored in OLAP (on-line analytical processing) cubes. Analysts could use the OLAP cubes to drill down and find information and relationships which could be useful in the derivation of capability scores [ 106 ] (e.g., the worst case scores or the capability scores could be adjusted to reflect information discovered in the data analysis). Alternatively, information discovered during data analysis could be presented separately as part of the result presentation [ 110 ]. For example,  FIG. 8  depicts an interface in which an analyst could examine data with regard to years of experience of the individuals providing the data. This might demonstrate that the individuals who have been in their positions a shorter time have a uniformly more negative view of an organization&#39;s capabilities than individuals who have spent a significant portion of their career with the organization. 
     Similarly, the process described above in relation to  FIG. 1  could be modified by the inclusion of various types of feedback loops. For example, as set forth above, data such as specific goals and complexity levers, which is gathered in one engagement can, in some implementations, be used to facilitate future engagements (e.g., goals and complexity levers identified in a first engagement can be used as samples for a second engagement). However, it is also possible the data used might be altered, as opposed to simply being augmented. For example, in an implementation in which the exemplars used in the secondary data collection [ 103 ] are used to indicate baseline, parity, and best practices levels for a particular capability, the exemplars could be revised to take into account information gained in evaluating particular organizations (e.g., if an organization has a particularly useful practice for a capability, the best practices exemplar for that capability could be modified to reflect that fact). Such modification might be done each time a new organization is evaluated, or it might be done on a quarterly, or other periodic basis. 
     Of course, these examples are not intended to be an exhaustive list of the types of variations which could be made on the illustrative process of  FIG. 1 . Instead, these examples are intended only to demonstrate that the process of  FIG. 1  is meant to be illustrative only, and not limiting. It is further intended that the claims of this application include all systems, methods, apparatuses and compositions of matter which fall within their literal terms, or which are insubstantially different therefrom.